Francis Bacon: the logic of sensation GILLES DELEUZE Translated from the French by Daniel W. Smith This work is published with the support of the French Ministry of Culture -Centre National du Livre. Liberli • Egolili • Frolern;I' REPUBLlQUE FRANC;:AlSE This book is supported by the French Ministry for Foreign Affairs, as part of the Burgess programme headed fClr the French Embassy in London by the Institut Fran<;:ais du Royaume-Uni. Continuulll The Tower Building 11 York Road London, SE I 7NX www.continuumbooks.com 370 Lexington Avenue New York, NY 1 00 1 7-6503 First published in France, 1 98 1 , by Editions de la DifIerence © Editions du Seuil, 2002, Francis Bacon: Logique de La Sensation This English translation © Continuum 2003 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or any information storage or retrieval system, without prior permission in writing from the publishers. British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data A catalogue record for this book is available from The British Library ISBN 0-8264 -6647-8 Typeset by BookEns Ltd . , Royston, Herts. Printed by MPG Books Ltd . , Bodmin, Cornwall Contents Translator's Preface, by Daniel W. Smith Preface to the French Edition, by Alain Badiou and Barbara Cassin Author's Foreword Author's P14ace to the English Edition 1. The Round Area, the Ring The round area and its analogues Distinction between the Figure and the figurative The fact* The question of "matters of fact" The three elements of painting: structure, :Figure, and contour Role of the fields 2. Note on Figuration in Past Painting Painting, religion, and photography On two misconceptions 3. Athleticism First movement: from the structure to the Figure -Isolation Athleticism Second movement: from the Figure to the structure The body escapes fl'om itself: abjection Contraction, dissipation: washbasins, umbrellas, and mirrors Vll Vlll IX X 8 1 2 4 . Body, Meat, and Spirit, Becoming-Animal 20 Man and animal The zone of indiscernibility III Contents Flesh and bone: the meat descends from the bone Pity � Head, face, and meat 5. Recapitulative Note: Bacon's Periods and Aspects From the scream to the smile: dissipation Bacon's three successive periods The coexistence of all the movements The functions of the contour 6. Painting and Sensation Cezanne and sensation The levels of sensation � Figuration and violence The movement of translation, the stroll � The phenomenological unity of the senses: sensation and rhythm 27 34 7. Hysteria 44 The body without organs: Artaud Worringer's Gothic line What the "difference of level" in sensation means � Vibration � Hysteria and presence � Bacon's doubt Hysteria, painting, and the eye 8. Painting Forces 56 Rendering the invisible: the problem of painting Deformation: neither transformation nor decomposition � The scream � Bacon's love of life Enumeration of forces 9. Couples and Triptychs 65 Coupled Figures The battle and the coupling of sensation � Resonance Rhythmic Figures � Amplitude and the three rhythms -Two types of "matters of fact" 10. Note: What Is a Triptych? 74 The attendant -The active and the passive � The fall: the active reality of the difference in level � Light, union and separation IV Contents II. The Painting before Painting . . . 86 Cezanne and the fight against the cliche Bacon and photographs -Bacon and probabilities Theory of chance: accidental marks The visual and the manual The status of the figurative 1 2 . The Diagram 99 The diagram in Bacon (traits and color-patches) Its manual character* Painting and the experience of catastropheAbstract painting, code, and optical space Action Painting, diagram, and manual space What Bacon dislikes about both these ways 13. Analogy III Cezanne: the motif as diagram* The analogical and the digital . Painting and analogy The paradoxical status of abstract painting* The analogical language of Cezanne and of Bacon: plane, color, and mass* Modulation Resemblance recovered 1 4. Every Painter Recapitulates the History of 1 22 Painting in His or Her Own Way . . . Egypt and haptic presentation .. Essence and accident Organic representation and the tactile- optical world Byzantine art: a pure optical world? Gothic art and the manual Ligh t and color, the optic and the haptic 1 5 . Bacon's Path 1 35 The haptic world and its avatars * Colorism .. A new modulation _. From Van Gogh and Gauguin to Bacon The two aspects of color: bright tone and broken tone, field and Figure, shores and flows . . . v Contents 1 6 . Note on Color Color and the three elements of painting- Color-structure: the fields and their divisions The role of black Color-force: Figures, flows, and broken tones Heads and shadows Color--contour -Painting and taste: good and bad taste 1 44 1 7 . The Eye and the Hand 1 54 Digital, tactile, manual, and haptic _. The practice of the diagram -On "completely different" relations Michelangelo: the pictorial fact Index of Paintings 1 62 Notes 1 73 Index 1 97 VI Translator) s Preface The original French version of Francis Bacon: The Logic oj Sensation was published in 1981 by Editions de la Difference as a two-volume set in their series La Vue Ie Texte, edited by Harry Jancovici. The first volume contained Deleuze's essay, while the second volume consisted exclusively of full-page reproductions of Bacon's paintings, allowing readers to view and study the reproductions directly alongside Deleuze's text. Regret- tably, it was not possible to include reproductions in the present edition. Images of Bacon's paintings, however, are widely available both online and in catalogs, and i t goes without saying that Deleuze's book is best read with such images on hand for viewing. The paintings cited by Deleuze are designated by a number in brackets, which refer to the chronological list of Bacon's paintings at the end of the volume. This translation might never have seen the light of day were it not for the tireless efforts of Tristan Palmer, to whom lowe a debt of gratitude. I would also like to thank Philippa Hudson for her careful reading of the manuscript . VII Preface to the French Edition Gilles Deleuze's book on Francis Bacon is something other than a study of a painter by a philosopher. Moreover, is this even a book "on" Bacon? Who is the philosopher, and who is the painter? We mean: Who is thinking, and who looking at thought? One can certainly think painting, but one can also paint thought, including the exhilarating and violent form of thought that is painting. We said to ourselves: "No doubt it will be impossible to match the splendor of the first edition. Too many things will be missing in the register of the visible. But is this a reason for us to forgo our duty, which is to ensure the continued circulation of this great book, and to prevent at any price its disappearance from the circulation to which it is destined and which has made it pass from hand to hand among lovers of philopainting or pictophilosophy, and among the perspicacious lovers of the equivalence, in the form of a fold, between thc visible and its nominal inverse?" We have therefore decided to republish this book in the collection "L'Ordre philosophique," in which the func- tion of cvery book is to create disorder. And this book in particular. For the disorder that makes up one of the most beautiful books of our "Ordre," we would like to express our profound gratitude to those who have made this (re )publication possible, and who have thereby allowed us to do our duty. Alain Badiou and Barbara Cassin VllI Author)s Foreword Each of the following rubrics considers one aspect of Bacon's paintings, in an order that moves from the simplest to the most complex. But this order is relative, and is valid only from the viewpoint of a general logic of sensation. All these aspects, of course, coexist in reality. They converge in color, in the "coloring sensation," which is the summit of this logic. Each aspect could serve as the theme of a particular sequence in the history of painting. IX Author) s Preface to the English Edition! Francis Bacon's painting is of a very special violence. Bacon, to be sure, often traffics in the violence of a depicted scene: spectacles of horror, crucifixions, prostheses and mutilations, monsters. But these are overly facile detours, detours that the artist himself judges severely and condemns in his work. What directly interests him is a violence that is involved only with color and line: the violence of a sensation (and not ofa representation), a static or potential violence, a violence of reaction and expression. For example, a scream rent from us by a foreboding of invisible forces: "to paint the scream morc than the horror . . . " In the end, Bacon's Figures are not racked bodies at all, but ordinary bodies in ordinary situations of constraint and discomfort . A man ordered to sit still for hours on a narrow stool is bound to assume contorted postures. The violence of a hiccup, of the urge to vomit, but also of a hysterical, involuntary smile . . . . Bacon's bodies, heads, Figures are made of flesh, and what fascinates him are the invisible forces that model flesh or shake it. This is the relationship not of form and matter, but of materials and forces making these forces visible through their effects on the flesh. There is, before anything else, a force of inertia that is of the flesh itself: with Bacon, the flesh, x Author's Priface to the English Edition however firm, descends from the bones; it falls or tends to fall away from them (hence those flattened sleepers who keep one arm raised, or the raised thighs from which the flesh seems to cascade) . What fascinates Bacon is not movement, but its effect on an immobile body: heads whipped by the wind or deformed by an aspiration, but also all the interior forces that climb through the flesh. To make the spasm visible. The entire body becomes plexus. If there is feeling in Bacon, it is not a taste for horror, it is pity, an intense pity: pity for the flesh, including the flesh of dead animals . . . . There is another element in Bacon's painting: the large fields of color on which the Figure detaches itself � fields without depth, or with only the kind of shallow depth that characterizes post-cubism. These large shores are them- selves divided into sections, or crossed by tubes or very thin rails, or sliced by a band or largish stripe. They form an armature, a bone structure. Sometimes they are like a ship's rigging, suspended in the sky of the field of color, upon which the Figure executes its taunting acrobatics. These two pictorial elements do not remain indifferent to one another, but instead draw life from one another. I t often seems that the flat fields o f color curl around the Figure, together constituting a shallow depth, forming a hollow volume, determining a curve, an isolating track or ring at the core of which the Figure enacts i ts small feats (vomiting in a sink, shutting the door with the tip of its foot, twisting i tselfon a stool). This kind of situation finds its equivalent only in theater, or in a Beckett novel such as Le Depeupleur � "inside a flattened cylinder . . . . The light . . . . I ts yellowness"2 � or else it is found in visions of bodies plunging in a black tunnel [44 J . But if these fields Xl Author's Priface to the English Edition of color press toward the Figure, the Figure in turn presses outward, trying to pass and dissolve through the fields. Already we have here the role of the spasm, or of the scream: the entire body trying to escape, to flow out of itself. And this occurs not only in Bacon's sinks, but through his famous umbrellas which snatch part of the Figure and which have a prolonged, exaggerated point, like vampires: the entire body trying to flee, to disgorge itself through a tip or a hole. Or else, on the contrary, it will flatten itself and stretch itself into a thick mirror, lodging its entirety into this width until it separates and dissipates like a lump offat in a bowl of soup. The Figures themselves always present scrubbed zones and blurred ones which attest to this dissipation. As of 1 978-9, we can speak of a few paintings still rare with Bacon in which the Figure has in effect disappeared, leaving a trace or a geyser, a jet of water [82 ] , of vapor, sand, dust, or grass [see 86, 88, 97] . This new period, which seems so rich in possibilities for the future, is an abstraction which is purely Bacon's. I t consummates the double motion, of the fields of color toward the Figure, and of the Figure toward the fields. Bacon is a very great colorist. And with him, color is related to many different systems, two most importantly - one of which corresponds to the Figure/flesh, and the other to the color field/section. It is as though Bacon has reassumed the entire problem of painting after Cezanne. Cezanne's "solution" basically a modulation of color by means of distinct touches that proceed according to the order of the spectrum in effect gave birth or rebirth to two problems: how, on the one hand, to preserve the homogeneity or unity of the background as though it XII Author's Preface to the English Edition were a perpendicular armature for chromatic progres- sion, while on the other hand also preserving the specificity or singularity of a form in perpetual variation? This was the new problem for Van Gogh as much as for Gauguin a problem with two pressing dangers, since the ground could not be allowed to remain inert, nor could the form become murky or dissolve into grisaille. Van Gogh and Gauguin rediscovered the art of the portrait, " the portrait through color," by restoring to the back- ground vast monochrome fields that are carried toward infinity, and by inventing new colors for the flesh that are "far from nature" colors that seem to have been baked in a kiln, and which rival ceramics. The first aspect has not ceased to inspire experiments in modern painting: those great, brilliant monochrome fields that take life not in variations of hue, but in very subtle shifts of intensity or saturation determined by zones of proximity. This would be Bacon's path: where these zones of proximity are ind uced either by sections of fields of color, or by virtue of a white stretched band or large stripe which crosses the field (an analogous structure can be found in Barnett Newman) . The other aspect, the colors of the flesh, was to be resolved by Bacon along lines that Gauguin presaged: by producing broken tones [tons rompusJ, as though baked in a furnace and flayed by fire. Bacon's genius as a colorist exists in both of these ideas at once, while most modern painters have concentrated on the first. These two aspects are strict correlates in Bacon: a brilliant, pure tone for the large fields, coupled with a program of intensification; broken tones for the flesh, coupled with a procedure of rupturing or "fireblasting," a critical mixture of complementaries. I t is as though painting X III A uthor's Preface to the English Edition were able to conquer time in two ways: through color as eternity and light in the infinity of a field, where bodies fall or go through their paces; and in another way as passage, as metabolic variability in the enactment of these bodies, in their flesh and on their skin ( thus three large male backs with varying chasms in value [63J ) . It is a Chronochromie, in the spirit in which the composer Olivier Messiaen named one of his works. The abandonment of simple figuration is the general fact of Modern painting and, still more, of painting altogether, of all time. But what is interesting is the way in which Bacon, for his part, breaks with figuration: it is not impressionism, not expressionism, not symbolism, not cubism, not abstraction . . . . Never (except perhaps in the case of Michelangelo) has anyone broken with figuration by elevating the Figure to such prominence. It is the confrontation of the Figure and the field, their solitary wrestling in a shallow depth, that rips the painting away from all narrative but also from all symbolization. When narrative or symbolic, figuration obtains only the bogus violence of the represented or the signified; it expresses nothing of the violence of sensation in other words, of the act of painting. I t was natural, even necessary, that Bacon should revive the triptych: in this format he finds the conditions for painting and for color exactly as he conceives them to be. The triptych has thoroughly separate sections, truly distinct, which in advance negate any narrative that would establish itself among them. Yet Bacon also links these sections with a kind of brutal, unifying distribution that makes them interrelate in a way that is free of any symbolic undercurrent. It is in the triptychs that colors become light, and that light divides itself into colors. In XIV A.lItilor's Pre/aCf to the English Edition them, one discovers rhythm as the essence of painting. For it is never a matter of this or that character, this or that object possessing rhythm. On the contrary, rhythms and rhythms alone become characters, become objects . Rhythms are the only characters, the only Figures. The triptych's function is precisely to this point to make evident that which might otherwise risk remaining hidden. What a triptych's three panels distribute in various ways is analogous to three basic rhythms one steady or "attendant" rhythm, and two other rhythms, one of crescendo or simplification (dim bing, expanding, diastolic, adding value) , the other of diminuendo or elimination (descending, contracting, systolic, removing value) . Let us consider every Bacon triptych: in any given case, where is the attendant-Figure, where is the adjunctive or the reductive Figure? A 1972 Triptych [70] shows a Figure whose back is "diminished," but whose leg is already complete, and another Figure whose torso has been completed, but who is missing one leg and whose other leg runs. These are monsters from the point of view of figuration. But from the point of view of the Figures themselves, these are rhythms and nothing else, rhythms as in a piece of music, as in the music of Messiaen, which makes you hear "rhythmic characters." If one keeps in mind the development of the triptych, and this way Bacon has of effecting relationships between painting and music, then one can return to the simple paintings. No doubt one would see that each of them is organized as though a triptych, that each already encompasses a triptych, each distributes rhythms, at least three, as though so many Figures resonating in the field, and that the field separates and unites them, superposes them, of a piece. xv

Chapter 1 The Round Area, the Ring The round area and its analogues Distinction between the Figure and the figurative The fact The question of "matters of fact" The three elements of painting: structure, Figure, and contour Role of the fields A round area often delimits the place where the person that is to say, the Figure is seated, lying down, doubled over, or in some other position. This round or oval area takes up more or less space: it can extend beyond the edges of the painting [64, 37] or occupy the center of a triptych [60, 6 1]. It is often duplicated, or even replaced, by the roundness of the chair on which the person is seated, or by the oval of the bed on which the person is lying. It can be dispersed in the small disks that surround a part of the person's body, or in the gyratory spirals that encircle the bodies. Even the two peasants in Two Men Working in a Field [66] form a Figure only in relation to an awkward plot of land, tightly confined within the oval of a pot. In short, the painting is composed like a circus ring, a kind of amphitheater as "place . " It is a very simple technique that consists in isolating the Figure. There are other techniques of isolation: putting the Figure inside a cube, or rather, inside a parallelepiped of glass or ice [6, 55] ; sticking it onto a rail or a stretch-out Francis Bacon bar, as if on the magnetic arc of an infinite circle [62J ; or combining all these means -the round area, the cube, and the bar as in Bacon's strangely flared and curved armchairs [38J. These are all "places" [lieux] . In any case, Bacon does not hide the fact that these techniques are rather rudimentary, despite the subtlety of their combinations. The important point is that they do not consign the Figure to immobility but, on the contrary, render sensible a kind of progression, an exploration of the Figure within the place, or upon itself. It is an operative field. The relation of the Figure to its isolating place defines a "fact" : "the fact is . . . ," "what takes place is . . , ." Thus isolated, the Figure becomes an Image, an Icon. Not only is the painting an isolated reality, and not only does the triptych have three isolated panels (which above all must not be united in a single frame), but the Figure itself is isolated in the painting by the round area or the parallelepiped. Why? Bacon often explains that it is to avoid the figurative, illustrative, and narrative character the Figure would necessarily have if it were not isolated. Painting has neither a model to represent nor a story to narrate. It thus has two possible ways of escaping the figurative: toward pure form, through abstraction; or toward the purely figural, through extraction or isolation. If the painter keeps to the Figure, if he or she opts for the second path, it will be to oppose the "figural" to the figurative. ! Isolating the Figure will be the primary requirement. The figurative (representation) implies the relationship of an image to an object that it is supposed to illustrate; but it also implies the relationship of an image to other images in a composite whole which assigns a 2 The Round Area, the Ring specific object to each of them. Narration is the correlate of illustration. A story always slips into, or tends to slip into, the space between two figures in order to animate the illustrated whole.2 I solation is thus the simplest means, necessary though not sufficient, to break with representation, to disrupt narration, to escape illustra- tion, to liberate the Figure: to stick to the fact. Clearly the problem is more complicated than this. Is there not another type of relationship between Figures, one that would not be narrative, and from which no figuration would follow? Diverse Figures that would spring from the same fact, that would belong to one and the same unique fact rather than telling a story or referring to different objects in a figurative whole? Nonnarrative relationships between Figures, and non- illustrative relationships between the Figures and the fact? Coupled Figures have always been a part of Bacon's work, but they do not tell a story [60, 6 1 , 66] . Moreover, there is a relationship of great intensity between the separate panels of a triptych, although this relationship has nothing narrative about it [55, 62, 38] . With modesty, Bacon acknowledges that classical painting often succeeded in drawing this other type of relationship between Figures, and that this is still the task of the painting of the future: Of course, so many of the greatest paintings have been done with a number of figures on a canvas, and of course every painter longs to do that . . . . But the story that is already being told between one figure and another begins to cancel out the possibilities of what can be done with the paint on its own. And this is a 3 Francis Bacon very great difficulty. But at any moment somebody will come along and be able to put a number of figures on a canvas." 3 What is this other type of relationship, a relationship between coupled or distinct Figures? Let us call these new relationships matters of jact,4 as opposed to intelligible relations (of objects or ideas) . Even if we acknowledge that, to a large degree, Bacon had already conquered this domain, he did so under more complex aspects than those we have yet considered. We are still at the simple aspect of isolation. A Figure is isolated within a ring, upon a chair, bed, or sofa, inside a circle or parallelepiped. It occupies only a part of the painting. What then fills the rest of the painting? A certain number of possibilities are already annulled, or without interest, for Bacon. What fills the rest of the painting will be neither a landscape as the correlate of the Figure, nor a ground from which the form will emerge, nor a formless chiaroscuro, a thickness of color on which shadows would play, a texture on which variation would play. Yet we are moving ahead too quickly. For there are indeed, in Bacon's early works, landscape-Figures like the Van Gogh of 1 957 [23]; there are extremely shaded textures, as in Figure in a Landscape ( 1945) [2] and Figure Study I ( 1 945-6) [4] ; there are thicknesses and densities like those of Head II ( 1 949) [5]; and above all, there is that alleged period of ten years which, according to Sylvester, was dominated by the somber, the dark, and the tonal, before Bacon returned to the "clear and precise . "5 But destiny can sometimes pass through detours that seem to contradict it. For Bacon's landscapes 4 The Round Area, the Ring arc a preparation for what will later appear as a set of short "involuntary free marks" lining the canvas, asignifjing traits6 that are devoid of any illustrative or narrative function: hence the importance of grass, and the irremediably grassy character of these landscapes (Land- scape, 1952 [8] ; Study oj a Figure in a Landscape, 1952 [9] ; Study if a Baboon, 1953 [14] ; Two Figures in the Grass, 1954 [17] ). As for the textures, the thick, the dark, and the blurry, they are already preparing for the great technique of local scrubbing [nettoyage local] with a rag, handbroom, or brush, in which the thickness is spread out over a nonfigurative zone. Clearly these two techniques of local scrubbing and asignifying traits belong to an original system which is neither that of the landscape, nor that of the formless or the ground (although, by virtue of their autonomy, they are apt to "make" a landscape or to "make" a ground, or even to "make" darkness). In fact, the rest of the painting is systematically occu pied by large fields [aplats ] of brigh t, uniform, and motionless color. Thin and hard, these fields have a structuring and spatializing function. They are not beneath, behind, or beyond the Figure, but are strictly to the side of it, or rather, all around it, and are thus grasped in a close view, a tactile or "haptic" view, just as the Figure i tself is. 7 At this stage, when one moves from the Figure to the fields of color, there is no relation of depth or distance, no incertitude of light and shadow. Even the shadows and the blacks are not dark (" I tried to make the shadows as present as the Figure" ) . If the fields function as a background, they do so by virtue of their strict correlation with the Figures. It is the correlation oj two sectors on a single plane, equally close. This correlation, this 5 Francis Bacon connection, is i tself provided by the place, by the ring or round area, which is the common limit of the two, their contour. This is what Bacon says in a very important statement to which we will frequently recur. He distinguishes three fundamental elements in his painting, which are the material structure, the round contour, and the raised image. If we think in sculptural terms, we would have to say: the armature; the pedestal, which would be mobile; and the Figure, which would move along the armature together with the pedestal. If we had to illustrate them (and to a certain degree this is necessary, as in the Man with Dog of 1 953 [ IS]), we would say: a sidewalk, some pools, and the people who emerge from the pools on the way to their "daily round. "8 We will see later what the various elements of this system have to do with Egyptian art, Byzantine art, and so forth. But what concerns us here is this absolute proximity, this co-precision, of the field that functions as a ground, and the Figure that functions as a form, on a single plane that is viewed at close range. I t is this system, this coexistence of two immediately adjacent sectors, which encloses space, which constitutes an absolutely closed and revolving space, much more so than if one had proceeded with the somber, the dark, or the indistinct. This is why there is indeed a certain blurriness in Bacon; there are even two kinds of blurriness, but they both belong to this highly precise system. In the first case, the blur is obtained not by indistinctness, but on the contrary by the operation that "consists in destroying clarity by clarity,"9 as in the man with the pig's head in the Self- Portrait of 1 973 [72] , or the treatment of crumpled newspapers: as Leiris says, their typographic characters 6 The Round A rea, the Ring alT clearly drawn, and it is their very mechanical precision that stands opposed to their legibility. 1O In the other case, the blur is obtained by the techniques of free marks or scrubbing, both of which are also among the precise elements of the system. (We will see that there is yet a third case. ) 7 Chapter 2 Note on Figuration zn Past Painting Painting, religion, and photography On two misconceptions Painting has to extract the Figure from the figurative. But Bacon invokes two developments which seem to indicate that modern painting has a different relation to figuration or illustration than the painting of the past has. First, photography has taken over the illustrative and docu- mentary role, so that modern painting no longer needs to fulfill this function, which still burdened earlier painters. Second, painting used to be conditioned by certain "religious possibilities" that still gave a pictorial meaning to figuration, whereas modern painting is an atheistic game. l Yet it is by no means certain that these two ideas, taken from Malraux, are adequate. On the one hand, such activities are in competition with each other, and one art would never be content to assume a role abandoned by another. It is hard to imagine an activity that would take over a function relinquished by a superior art. The photograph, though instantaneous, has a completely different ambition than representing, 8 Note on Figuration in Past Paintin/!, illustrating, or narrating. And when Bacon speaks of his own use of photographs, and of the relationships between photography and painting, he has much more profound things to say. On the other hand, the link between the pictorial element and religious sentiment, in past paint- ing, in turn seems poorly defined by the hypothesis of a figurative function that was simply sanctified by faith. Consider an extreme example: El Greco's The Burial oj the Count oj Orgaz (1586-8) [106] . A horizontal divides the painting into two parts: upper and lower, celestial and terrestrial. In the lower half, there is indeed a figuration or narration that represents the burial of the count, although all the coefficients of bodily deformation, and notably elongation, are already at work. But in the upper half, where the count is received by Christ, there is a wild liberation, a total emancipation: the Figures are lifted up and elongated, refined without measure, outside all constraint. Despite appearances, there is no longer a story to tell; the Figures are relieved of their representat- ive role, and enter directly into relation with an order of celestial sensations. This is what Christian painting had already discovered in the religious sentiment: a properly pictorial atheism, where one could adhere literally to the idea that God must not be represented. With God but also with Christ, the Virgin, and even Hell lines, colors, and movements are freed from the demands of repres- entation. The Figures are lifted up, or doubled over, or contorted, freed from all figuration. They no longer have anything to represent or narrate, since in this domain they are content to refer to the existing code of the Church. Thus, in themselves, they no longer have to do with anything but "sensations" celestial, infernal, or 9 Francis Bacon terrestrial sensations. Everything is made to pass through the code; the religious sentiment is painted in all the colors of the world. One must not say, " If God docs not exist, everything is permitted ." It is j ust the opposite. For with God, everything is permitted. It is with God that everything is permitted, not only morally, since acts of violence and infamies always find a holy justification, but aesthetically, in a much more important manner, because the divine Figures are wrought by a free creative work, by a fantasy in which everything is permitted . Christ's body is fashioned by a truly diabolical inspiration that makes it pass through all the "areas of sensation," through all the "levels of different feelings ." Consider two further examples. In Giotto's Stigmatization of St. Francis (12971300) [lOS], Christ i s transformed into a kite in the sky, a veritable airplane, which sends the stigmata to St. Francis, while the hatched lines that trace the path to the stigmata are like free marks, which the Saint manipulates as if they were the strings of the airplane- kite. Or Tintoretto's Creation of the Animals (c. 1 550) [109]: God is like a referee firing the gun at the start of a handicapped race, in which the birds and the fish leave first, while the dog, the rabbits, the cow, and the unicorn await their turn. Thus we cannot say that it was religious sentiment that sustained figuration in the painting of the past; on the contrary, it made possible a liberation of Figures, the emergence of Figures freed from all figuration. Nor can we say that the renunciation of figuration was easier for modern painting as a game. On the contrary, modern painting is invaded and besieged by photographs and cliches that are already lodged on the canvas before the 10 ."(ote on Figuration in Past Painting painter even begins to work. I n fact, i t would be a mistake to think that the painter works on a white and virgin surface. The entire surface is already invested virtually with all kinds of cliches, which the painter will have to break with. This is exactly what Bacon says when he speaks of the photograph: it is not a figuration of what one sees, it is what modern man sees.2 I t is dangerous not simply because it is figurative, but because it claims to reign over vision, and thus to reign over painting. Having renounced the religious sentiment, but besieged by the photograph, modern painting finds itself in a situation which, despite appearances, makes it much more difficult to break with the figuration that would seem to be its miserable reserved domain. Abstract painting attests to this difficulty: the extraordinary work of abstract painting was necessary in order to tear modern art away from figuration. But is there not another path, more direct and more sensible? 11 Chapter 3 Athleticism First movement: from the structure to the Figure Isolation Athleticism Second movement: from the Figure to the structure The body escapes from itself: abjection Contraction, dissipation: washbasins, um- brellas, and mirrors Let us return to Bacon's three pictorial elements: the large fields as a spatializing material structure; the Figure, the Figures and their fact; and the place that is, the round area, the ring, or the contour, which is the common limit of the Figure and the field . The shape of the contour seems to be very simple: round or oval; it is rather its color that poses problems, because of the dynamic double relationship in which it is caught up. The contour, as a "place," is in fact the place of an exchange in two directions: between the material structure and the Figure, and between the Figure and the field. The contour is like a membrane through which this double exchange flows. Something happens in both directions. Ifpainting has nothing to narrate and no story to tell, something is happening all the same, something which defines the functioning of the painting. Within the round area, the Figure is sitting on the chair, lying on the bed, and sometimes it even seems to be 1 2 Athleticism waltmg for what is about to happen. But what is happening, or is about to happen, or has already happened, is not a spectacle or a representation. I n Bacon, these waiting Figures or "attendants" are not spectators. One discovers in Bacon's paintings an attempt to eliminate every spectator, and consequently every spectacle. Thus the 1 969 bullfight exists in two versions: in the first, the large field still includes an open panel through which we can glimpse a crowd, like a Roman legion at an amphitheater [56] ; but the second version closes off this panel, and is no longer content merely to intertwine the two Figures of the toreador and the bull, but truly achieves their unique or common fact, while at the same time the mauve stripe disappears, which linked the spectators to what was still a spectacle [57 ] . Three Studies rif Isabel Rawsthorne ( 1 967 ) [43] shows the Figure closing the door on an intruder or visitor, even if this is its own double. In many cases there seems to subsist, distinct from the Figure, a kind of spectator, a voyeur, a photograph, a passerby, an "attendant": notably, but not exclusively [59] , in the triptychs, where it is almost a law. However, we will see that, in his paintings and especially in his triptychs, Bacon needs the function of an attendant, which is not a spectator but part of the Figure. Even the simulacra of photographs, hung on a wall or a railing, can play this role of an attendant. They are attendants not in the sense of spectators, but as a constant or point of reference in relation to which a variation is assessed . The sole spectacle is in fact the spectacle of waiting or effort, but these are produced only when there are no longer any spectators. This is where Bacon resembles Kafka: Bacon's Figure is the great Scandal, 13 Francis Bacon or the great Swimmer who does not know how to swim, the champion of abstinence; and the ring, the amphi- theater, the platform is the theater of Oklahoma. In this respect, everything in Bacon reaches its culmination in the Painting of 1 978 [8 1 ] : s tuck onto a panel, the Figure tenses i ts entire body and a leg, in order to turn the key in the door with i ts foot from the other side of the painting. We note that the contour or the round area, a very beautiful golden orange, is no longer on the ground but has migrated, and is now situated on the door itself, so that the Figure seems to be standing up on the vertical door at the extreme point of the foot, in a reorganization of the entire painting. In this attempt to eliminate the spectator, the Figure already demonstrates a singular athleticism, all the more singular in that the source of the movement is not in i tself. Instead, the movement goes from the material s tructure, from the field , to the Figure. In many paintings, the field is caught up in a movement that forms it into a cylinder: i t curls around the contour, around the place; and i t envelops and imprisons the Figure. The material s tructure curls around the contour in order to imprison the Figure, which accompanies the movement of all the structure's forces. It is the extreme solitude of the Figures, the extreme confinement of the bodies, which excludes every spectator: the Figure becomes a Figure only through this movement which confines it and in which it confines itself. "Abode where lost bodies roam each searching for its lost one [dipeupleur] . . . . Inside a flattened cylinder fifty metres round and eighteen high for the sake of harmony. The light . I ts dimness. I ts yellowness. "! Either the fall is suspended in the black hole of the 14 Athleticism cylinder r 44 J: this is the first formula for a derisory athletics, a violent comedy in which the bodily organs are prostheses. Or else the place, the contour, becomes an apparatus for the Figure's gymnastics on the fields of color [60]. But the other movement, which obviously coexists with the first, is on the contrary the movement of the Figure toward the material structure, toward the field of color. From the start, the Figure has been a body, and the body has a place within the enclosure of the round area. But the body is not simply waiting for something from the structure, it is waiting for something inside itself, it exerts an effort upon i tself in order to become a Figure. Now it is inside the body that something is happening; the body is the source of movement. This is no longer the problem of the place, but rather of the event. If there is an effort, and an intense effort, it is in no way an extraordinary effort, as if it were a matter of undertaking something above and beyond the strength of the body and directed toward a separate object. The body exerts itself in a very precise manner, or waits to escape from itself in a very precise manner. It is not I who attempt to escape from my body, it is the body that attempts to escape from itself by means of . . . . in short, a spasm: the body as plexus, and its effort or waiting for a spasm. Perhaps this is Bacon's approximation of horror or abjection. There is one painting that can guide us, the Figure at a Washbasin of 1 976 [801: clinging to the oval oI' the washbasin, its hands clutching the f�lUcets, the body-Figure exerts an intense motionless effort upon itself in order to escape down the blackness of the drain. Joseph Conrad describes a similar scene in which he too saw the image of abjection: in the 15 Francis Bacon hermetic cabin of the ship, during a wild tempest, the "nigger" of the Narcissus hears the other sailors who have succeeded in carving a small hole in the bulkhead that imprisons him. It is one of Bacon's paintings. That infamous nigger rushed at the hole, put his lips to it , and whispered "Help" in an almost extinct voice; he pressed his head to it, trying madly to get out through that opening one inch wide and three inches long. In our disturbed state we were absolutely paralyzed by his incredible action. It seemed impossible to drive him away.2 The standard formula, "To pass through the eye of a needle," trivializes this abomination or Destiny. I t is a scene of hysteria. The entire series of spasms in Bacon is of this type: scenes of love, of vomiting and excreting [73] , in which the body attempts to escape from itself through one of i ts organs in order to rejoin the field or material structure. Bacon has often said that, in the domain of Figures, the shadow has as much presence as the body; but the shadow acquires this presence only because it escapes from the body; the shadow is the body that has escaped from itself through some localized point in the contour [63] . And the scream, Bacon's scream, is the operation through which the entire body escapes through the mouth [6] . All the pressures of the body . . . . The bowl of the washbasin is a place, a contour, it is a replication of the round area. But here, the new position of the body in relation to the contour shows that we have arrived at a more complex aspect (even if this aspect was there from the start ) . I t is no longer the material structure that curls around the contour in order to envelop the 16 Athleticism Figure, i t is the Figure that wants to pass through a vanishing point in the contour in order to dissipate into the material structure. This is the second direction of the exchange, and the second form of a derisory athletics. The contour thus assumes a new function, since it no longer lies flat, but outlines a hollow volume and has a vanishing point. Bacon's umbrellas, in this respect, are analogues of the washbasin. In the two versions of Painting, 1 946 and 1 971 [3, 65] , the Figure is clearly lodged within the round area of a balustrade, but at the same time it lets itself be grabbed by the half-spherical umbrella, and appears to be waiting to escape in its entirety through the point of the instrument : already we can no longer see anything but its abject smile. In Studies of the Human Body (1970) [62] and Triptych, May-June 1974 [ 75], the green umbrella is treated more like a surface, but the crouching Figure uses it all at once as a pendulum, a parachute, a vacuum cleaner, and a nozzle, through which the entire contracted body wants to pass, and which has already grabbed hold of the head. The splendor of these umbrellas as contours, with one point s tretched downwards . . . . In literature, it is William Burroughs who has best evoked this effort of the body to escape through a point or through a hole that forms a part of i tsclfor its surroundings: "Johnny's body begins to contract, pulling up toward his chin . Each time the contraction is longer. 'Wheeeeecee!' the boy yell, every muscle tense, his whole body strain to empty through his cOCk.":l In much the same way, Bacon's Lying Figure with Hypodermic ,�yringe (1963) [3 1 ] is less a nailed-down body (though this is how Bacon describes it) than a body attempting to pass through the syringe and to escape 17 Francis Bacon through this hole or vanishing point functioning as a prosthesis-organ.4 If the ring or the round area is replicated in the washbasin and the umbrella, the cube or the parallel- epiped is also replicated in the mirror. Bacon's mirrors can be anything you like except a reflecting surface. The mirror is an opaque and sometimes black thickness [45] . Bacon does not experience the mirror in the same way as Lewis Carroll . The body enters the mirror and lodges i tself inside it, itself and its shadow. Hence the fascination: nothing is behind the mirror, everything is inside it [63 , 67] . The body seems to elongate, flatten, or stretch itself out in the mirror, just as it contracted itself by going through the hole. If need be, the head is split open by a large triangular crevasse, which will reappear on two sides, and disperse the head throughout the mirror like a lump offat in a bowl of soup [5 1 ] . But in both these cases, the umbrella and the washbasin as much as the mirror, the Figure is no longer simply isolated but deformed; sometimes contracted and aspirated, some- times stretched and dilated. This is because the movement is no longer that of the material structure curling around the Figure; it is the movement of the Figure going toward the structure and which, at the limit, tends to dissipate into the fields of color. The Figure is not simply the isolated body, but also the deformed body that escapes from itself. What makes deformation a destiny is that the body has a necessary relationship with the material structure: not only does the material structure curl around it, but the body must return to the material structure and dissipate into i t, thereby passing through or into these prostheses-instruments, which constitute passages and 1 8 Athleticism states that are real, physical, and effective, and which are sensations and not imaginings. Thus, in many cases, the mirror or the washbasin can be localized; but even then, what is happening in the mirror, or what is about to happen in the washbasin, can be immediately related to the Figure itself. What the mirror shows, or what the washbasin heralds, is exactly what happens to the Figure. The heads are all prepared to receive these deformations (hence the wiped, scrubbed, or rubbed out zones in the portraits of heads) . And to the degree that the instruments tend to occupy the whole of the material structure, they no longer even need to be specified: the entire structure can play the role of a virtual mirror, a virtual umbrella or washbasin, to the point where the instrumental deforma- tions are immediately transferred to the Figure. Thus, in the 1 973 Self-Portrait [72] of the man with the pig's head, the deformation takes place on the spot. Just as the effort of the body is exerted upon itself, so the deformation is static. An intense movement flows through the whole body, a deformed and deforming movement that at every moment transfers the real image onto the body in order to constitute the Figure. 1 9 Chapter 4 Body, Meat and Spirit, Becoming -Animal Man and animal The zone of indiscernibility Flesh and bone: the meat descends from the bone Pity Head, face, and meat The body is the Figure, or rather the material of the Figure. The material of the Figure must not be confused with the spatializing material structure , which is positioned in opposition to it . The body is the Figure, not the structure. Conversely, the Figure, being a body, is not the face, and does not even have a face. I t does have a head, because the head is an integral part of the body. It can even be reduced to the head. As a portraitist, Bacon is a painter of heads, not faces, and there is a great difference between the two. For the face is a structured, spatial organization that conceals the head, whereas the head is dependent upon the body, even if it is the point of the body, its culmination. It is not that the head lacks spirit; but i t is a spirit in bodily form, a corporeal and vital breath, an animal spiri t. I t is the animal spirit of man: a pig-spirit , a buffalo-spirit, a dog-spirit, a bat-spiri t . . . . Bacon thus pursues a very peculiar project as a portrait painter: to dismantle the face, 20 Body, Meat and Spirit to rediscover the head or make it emerge from beneath the face. The deformations which the body undergoes are also the animal traits of the head. This has nothing to do with a correspondence between animal forms and facial forms. In fact, the face lost its form by being subjected to the techniques of rubbing and brushing that disorganize it and make a head emerge in its place. And the marks or traits of animality are not animal forms, but rather the spirits that haunt the wiped off parts, that pull at the head, individualizing and qualifying the head without a face. l Bacon's techniques of local scrubbing and asignify- ing traits take on a particular meaning here. Sometimes the human head is replaced by an animal; but it is not the animal as a form, but rather the animal as a trait for example, the quivering trait of a bird spiraling over the scrubbed area, while the simulacra of portrait-faces on either side of it act as "attendants" (as in the 1 976 Triptych [79] ) . Sometimes an animal, for example a real dog, is treated as the shadow of its master [52] , or conversely, the man's shadow itself assumes an autonom- ous and indeterminate animal existence [73 ] . The shadow escapes from the body like an animal we had been sheltering. In place of formal correspondences, what Bacon's painting constitutes is a zone oj indiscernibility or undecidability between man and animal. Man becomes animal, but not without the animal becoming spirit at the same time, the spirit of man, the physical spirit of man presented in the mirror as Eumenides or Fate [77] . It is never a combination of forms, but rather the common fact: the common fact of man and animal. Bacon pushes this to the point where even his most isolated Figure is 2 1 Francis Bacon already a coupled Figure; man is coupled with his animal in a latent bullfight . This objective zone of indiscernibility is the entire body, but the body insofar as it is flesh or meat. Of course, the body has bones as well, but bones are only i ts spatial structure. A distinction is often made between flesh and bone, and even between things related to them. The body is revealed only when i t ceases to be supported by the bones, when the flesh ceases to cover the bones , when the two exist for each other, but each on i ts own terms: the bone as the material s tructure of the body, the flesh as the bodily material of the Figure . Bacon admires the young woman in Degas's After the Bath [ 1 0 1 ] , whose suspended spinal column seems to protrude from her flesh, making i t seem much more vulnerable and l ithe, acrobatic.2 I n a completely different context , Bacon has painted such a spinal column on a Figure doubled over in contortions ( Three Figures and a Portrait, 1 975 [78] ) . This pictorial tension between flesh and bone is something that must be achieved. And what achieves this tension in the painting is, precisely, meat, through the splendor of i ts colors. Meat is the state of the body in which flesh and bone confront each other locally rather than being composed structurally. The same is true of the mouth and the teeth, which are little bones. I n meat, the flesh seems to descend from the bones, while the bones rise up from the flesh. This is a feature of Bacon that distinguishes him from Rembrandt and Sou tine. If there is an " inter- pretation" of the body in Bacon, it lies in his taste for painting prone Figures, whose raised arm or thigh is equivalent to a bone, so that the drowsy flesh seems to 22 Body, Meat and Spirit descend from it . Thus, we find the two sleeping twins flanked by animal-spirit attendants in the central panel of the 1 968 triptych [53] ; but also the series of the sleeping man with raised arms [25] , the sleeping woman with vertical legs [28J , and the sleeper or addict with the hypodermic syringe [3 1 , 58] . Well beyond the apparent sadism, the bones are like a trapeze apparatus ( the carcass) upon which the flesh is the acrobat. The athleticism of the body is naturally prolonged in this acrobatics of the flesh. We can see here the importance of the fall [chute J in Bacon's work. Already in the crucifixions, what interests Bacon is the descent, and the inverted head that reveals the flesh. In the crucifixions of 1 962 and 1 965, we can see the flesh literally descending from the bones, framed by an armchair-cross and a bone-lined ring [29, 35] . For both Bacon and Kafka, the spinal column is nothing but a sword beneath the skin , slipped into the body of an innocent sleeper by an executioner.3 Sometimes a bone will even be added only as an afterthought in a random spurt of paint. Pity the meat! Meat is undoubtedly the chief object of Bacon's pity, his only object of pity, his Anglo-Irish pity. On this point he is like Soutine, with his immense pity for the Jew. Meat is not dead flesh; it retains all the sufferings and assumes all the colors of living flesh . I t manifests such convulsive pain and vulnerability, but also such delight- ful invention, color, and acrobatics. Bacon does not say, "Pity the beasts," but rather that every man who suffers is a piece of meat. Meat is the common zone of man and the beast, their zone of indiscerni bili ty; it is a "fact," a state where the painter identifies with the objects of his horror and his compassion. The painter is certainly a 23 Francis Bacon butcher, but he goes to the butcher's shop as if it were a church, with the meat as the crucified victim ( the Painting of 1 946 [3] ) . Bacon is a religious painter only in butcher's shops. I 've always been very moved by pictures about slaughterhouses and meat, and to me they belong very much to the whole thing of the Crucifixion . . . . Of course, we are meat, we are potential carcasses. If I go into a butcher shop I always think it's surprising that I wasn't there instead of the anima1 .4 Near the end of the eighteenth century, the novelist K. P. Moritz described a person with "strange feelings": an extreme sense of isolation, an insignificance almost equal to nothingness; the horror of sacrifice he feels when he witnesses the execution of four men, "exterminated and torn to pieces," and when he sees the remains of these men "thrown on the wheel" or over the balustrade; his certainty that in some strange way this event concerns all of us, that this discarded meat is we ourselves, and that the spectator is already in the spectacle, a "mass of ambulating flesh"; hence his living idea that even animals are part of humanity, that we are all criminals, we are all cattle; and then, his fascination with the wounded animal, a calf, the head, the eyes, the snout, the nostrils . . . and sometimes he lost himself in such sustained contempla- tion of the beast that he really believed he experienced, for an instant, the type of existence of such a being . . . in short, the question if he, among men, was a dog or another animal had already occupied his thoughts since childhood." 24 Body, Meat and Spirit Moritz's passages are magnificent. This is not an arrangement of man and beast, nor a resemblance; it is a deep identity, a zone of indiscernibility more profound than any sentimental identification: the man who suffers is a beast, the beast that suffers is a man. This is the reality of becoming. What revolutionary person in art, politics, religion, or elsewhere has not felt that extreme moment when he or she was nothing but a beast, and became responsible not for the calves that died, but bifore the calves that died? But can one say the same thing, exactly the same thing, about meat and the head, namely, that they are the zone of objective indecision between man and animal? Can one say objectively that the head is meat Uust as meat is spirit) ? Of all the parts of the body, is not the head the part that is closest to the bone? Look again at El Greco or Sou tine. Yet Bacon does not seem to think of the head in this manner. The bone belongs to the face, not to the head. According to Bacon, there is no death's-head. The head is deboned rather than bony, yet it is not at all soft, but firm. The head is of the flesh, and the mask itself is not a death mask, it is a block of firm flesh that has been separated from the bone: hence the studies for a portrait of William Blake [20, 2 1 ] . Bacon's own head is a piece of flesh haunted by a very beautiful gaze emanating from eyes without sockets. And he pays tribute to Rembrandt for having known how to paint a final self-portrait as one such block of flesh without eye sockets.6 Throughout Bacon's work, the relationship between the head and meat runs through a scale of intensity that renders i t increasingly intimate. First, the meat ( flesh on one side, bone on the other) is positioned on the edge of the ring or 25 Francis Bacon the balustrade where the Figure-head is seated [3] ; but it is also the dense, fleshly rain that surrounds the head and dismantles its face beneath the umbrella [65] . The scream that comes out of the Pope's mouth and the pity that comes out of his eyes have meat as their object [27] . Later, the meat is given a head, through which it takes flight and descends from the cross, as in the two preceding crucifixions [29 , 35] . Later still, Bacon's series of heads will assert their identity with meat, among the most beautiful of which are those painted in the colors of meat, red and blue [26] . Finally, the meat is itself the head, the head becomes the nonlocalized power of the meat, as in the 1 950 Fragment qf a Crucifixion [7] , where the meat howls under the gaze of a dog-spirit perched on top of the cross . Bacon dislikes this painting because of the simplicity of i ts rather obvious method: it had been enough to hollow out a mouth from solid meat. Still, it is important to understand the affinity of the mouth, and the interior of the mouth, with meat, and to reach the point where the open mouth becomes nothing more than the section of a severed artery, or even a jacket sleeve that is equivalent to an artery, as in the bloodied pillow in the Sweeney Agonistes triptych [46] . The mouth then acquires this power of nonlocalization that turns all meat into a head without a face. I t is no longer a particular organ, but the hole through which the entire body escapes, and from which the flesh descends (here the method of free, involuntary marks will be necessary) . This is what Bacon calls the Scream, in the immense pity that the meat evokes. 26 Chapter 5 Recapitulative Note: Bacon) s Periods and Aspects From the scream to the smile: dissipation Bacon's three successive periods The coexistence of all the movements The functions of the contour The head-meat is a becoming-animal of man. In this becoming, the entire body tends to escape from itself, and the Figure tends to return to the material s tructure. We have already seen this in the effort the Figure exerted upon i tself in order to pass through the point or the hole ; and even more so, in the state it assumed when i t went into the mirror on the wall . But i t has not yet dissolved into the material s tructure, it has not yet returned to the field in order to be truly dissipated in it , to be effaced on the wall of the closed cosmos, to melt into a molecular texture. It is this extreme point that will have to be reached in order to allow a jus tice to prevail that will no longer be anything but Color or Light, a space that will no longer be anything but the Sahara . l Which means that, whatever i ts importance, becoming-animal is only one stage in a more profound becoming-imperceptible in which the Figure disap- pears. 27 Francis Bacon The entire body escapes through the screaming mouth. The body escapes through the round mouth of the Pope or the nurse, as if through an artery [ 1 6 , 24] . According to Bacon, however, this is not the last word in the series of mouths. Bacon suggests that beyond the scream there is the smile, to which, he says, he has not yet been able to gain access.2 Bacon is certainly being modest; in fact, he has painted smiles that are among the most beautiful in painting, and which fulfill the strangest function, namely, that of securing the disappearance of the body. Bacon and Lewis Carroll meet on this single point: the smile of a cat.3 There is already a disquieting and disappearing smile in the head of the man underneath the umbrella in the Painting of 1 946 [3] , and the face is dismantled in favor of this smile, as if there were an acid eating away at the body; and the second version of the same man accentuates and straightens the smile [65 ] . Furthermore, there is the scoffing, almost untenable, and insupportable smile of the 1 954 Pope [ 1 9] or of the man sitting on the bed [ 1 1 ] : one senses that the smile will survive the effacement of the body. The eyes and the mouth are so completely caught up in the horizontal lines of the painting that the face is dissipated, in favor of the spatial coordinates in which only the insistent smile remains. How are we to name such a thing? Bacon suggests that this smile is "hysterical. "4 An abominable smile, an abjection of a smile. And if one dreams of introducing an order into a triptych, I believe that the 1 953 triptych [ 1 3] imposes the following order, which is not to be confused with the succession of panels: the screaming mouth in the center, the hysterical smile on the left , and finally, the inclined and dissipated head on the right:'> 28 Bacon's Periods and Aspects At this extreme point of cosmic dissipation, in a closed but unlimited cosmos, it is clear that the Figure can no longer be isolated or put inside a limit, a ring or parallelepiped: we are faced with different coordinates. The Figure of the screaming Pope [ 16] is already hidden behind the thick folds (which are almost laths) of a dark, transparent curtain: the top of the body is indistinct, persisting only as if it were a mark on a striped shroud, while the bottom of the body still remains outside the curtain, which is opening out. This produces the effect of a progressive elongation, as if the body were being pulled backwards by its upper half For a rather long period of time, this technique appeared frequently in Bacon's works. The same vertical curtain strips surround and partially line the abominable smile of Study Jar a Portrait [ 1 1 ] , while the head and the body seem to sink into the background, into the horizontal slats of the blind. It would seem that during this entire period, conventions were required that are the opposite of those we defined at the outset. We see everywhere the reign of the blurry [fiou] and the indeterminate, the action of a depth that pulls at the form, a thickness on which shadows play, a dark nuanced texture, effects of compression and elongation In short, a malerisch treatment, as Sylvester suggests.6 This is what justifies Sylvester in dividing Bacon's work into three periods: the first, in which the precise Figure confronts the hard and bright field of color; the second, in which the "malerisch" form is drawn against a curtained, tonal background; and finally the third, which brings together the "two opposite conventions" and returns to the vivid and thin ground, while reinventing locally the effects of blurriness by striping and brushing.? 29 Francis Bacon Yet it is not only the third period that invents the synthesis of the two. The second period had already not so much contradicted the first period as added to it , in the unity of a style and a creation. A new position of the Figure appears, but one that coexists with the others. At its simplest, the position behind the curtains is combined perfectly with the position on the ring, bar, or parallelepiped, in a Figure that is not only isolated, stuck, and contracted, but also abandoned, escaping, evanescent, and confused, as in the 1 952 Study for Crouching Nude [ 1 0] . And the Man with Dog of 1 953 [ 1 5] incorporates the three fundamental elements of painting, but within a scrambled whole where the Figure is nothing but a shadow; the puddle, an uncertain contour; and the sidewalk, a darkened surface. This is indeed the essential point: there is certainly a succession of periods, but there are also coexistent aspects that accord with the three simultaneous elements of painting, which are perpetually present. The armature or material structure, the posi- tioned Figure, and the contour as the limit of the two these will continue to constitute the highly precise system. It is within this system that the operations of brushing, the phenomena of blurriness, the effects of elongation and fading are produced, and which are all the stronger in that they constitute a movement within this whole that is itself precise. There will be or perhaps there would have been reason to distinguish a very recent fourth period. Suppose the Figure no longer had only elements of dissipation, and that it was no longer even content to privilege or return to this element. Suppose the Figure had effectively disappeared, leaving behind only a vague trace of its 30 Bacon's Periods and Aspects former presence. The field will then open up like a vertical sky, and at the same time will increasingly take over the structuring functions: the elements of the contour will establish more and more divisions within the field, creating flat sections and regions in space which form a free armature. But at the same time, the scrambled or wiped-off zone, which used to make the Figure emerge, will now stand on its own, independent of every definite form, appearing as a pure Force without an object: the wind of the tempest, the jet of water or vapor, the eye of the hurricane, which reminds one of Turner living in a world that had turned into a steamship [ 1 1 0] . Everything (particularly the black section) is organized around the confrontation of the two adjacent blues, the jet of water and the field of color [82] . The fact that we are familiar with only a few instances of this new organization in Bacon's work [86, 88, 97] must not make us rule out the possibility that this is a nascent period, which would be characterized by an "abstraction" that no longer has any need of the Figure . The Figure is dissipated by realizing the prophecy: you will no longer be anything but sand, grass, dust, or a drop of water . . . . 8 The landscape flows on its own outside of the polygon of presentation, retaining the disfigured elements of a sphinx that already seemed to be made of sand. But now the sand no longer retains any Figure; nor does the grass, earth, or water. And a radiant use of pastels lies at the transition between the Figures and these new empty spaces. The sand might even reconstitute the sphinx [83] , but it is so fragile and pastelized that we sense that the world of Figures is profoundly threatened by the new power. If we confine ourselves to the three attested periods, i t 3 1 Francis Bacon is difficult to comprehend the coexistence of all these movements. And yet the painting is this coexistence . Given the three basic elements Structure , Figure, and Contour a first movement ("tension") goes from the structure to the Figure. The structure then appears as a field of color, but one that will curl around the contour like a cylinder; the contour appears as an isolator a round area, an oval, a bar or system of bars; and the Figure is isolated within the contour, in a completely closed world. But it is here that a second movement, a second tension, is brought into play, one that goes from the Figure to the material structure: the contour changes, it turns into the half-sphere of the washbasin or umbrella, the thickness of the mirror, acting as a deformer; the Figure is contracted or dilated in order to pass through a hole or into the mirror; it experiences an extraordinary becoming-animal in a series of screaming transforma- tions; and it itself tends to return to the field of color, to dissipate into the structure with a final smile, through the intermediary of the contour, which no longer acts as a deformer, but as a curtain where the Figure shades off into infinity. Thus, this most closed of worlds was also the most unlimited. If we confine ourselves to the simplest element, the contour (which begins as a simple circle or round area) , we can see the variety of its functions at the same time as the development of its form: it is first of all isolating, the final territory of the Figure; but it is thus already the "depopulator" or the "deterritorializer," since i t forces the structure to curl around the Figure, cutting it off from any natural milieu; it is still a vehicle, since it guides the little stroll of the Figure in its remaining territory; and it is a trapeze apparatus or 32 Bacon's Periods and Aspects prosthesis, because it sustains the athleticism of the Figure confined inside it. It then acts as a deformer, when the Figure passes into it through a hole or a point; and it again becomes a trapeze apparatus or prosthesis in a new sense, for the acrobatics of the flesh; and finally, it is the curtain behind which the Figure is dissolved by joining with the structure. In short, it is a membrane, it has never ceased to be a membrane that assures the communication in both directions between the Figure and the material structure. I n the 1 978 Painting [8 1 ] , we can see that the golden orange contour that strikes the door has all these functions, and is ready to assume all these forms. Everything is divided into diastole and systole, with repercussions at each level. The systole, which contracts the body, goes from the structure to the Figure, while the diastole, which extends and dissipates it, goes from the Figure to the structure. But there is already a diastole in the first movement, when the body extends i tself in order to better close in on itself; and there is a systole in the second movement, when the body is contracted in order to escape from itself; and even when the body is dissipated, it still remains contracted by the forces that seize hold of it in order to return it to its surroundings. The coexistence of all these movements in the painting ' " . is rhythm. 33 Chapter 6 Painting and Sensation Cezanne and sensation The levels of sensation Figuration and violence The movement of translation, the stroll The phenomenological unity of the senses: sensation and rhythm There are two ways of going beyond figuration ( that is, beyond both the illustrative and the figurative) : either toward abstract form or toward the Figure. Cezanne gave a simple name to this way of the Figure: sensation. The Figure is the sensible form related to a sensation; it acts immediately upon the nervous system, which is of the flesh, whereas abstract form is addressed to the head, and acts through the intermediary of the brain, which is closer to the bone. Certainly Cezanne did not invent this way of sensation in painting, but he gave i t an unprecedented status. Sensation is the opposite of the facile and the ready-made, the cliche, but also of the "sensational ," the spontaneous, etc. Sensation has one face turned toward the subject ( the nervous system, vital movement, "instinct," "temperament" a whole vocabulary com- mon to both Naturalism and Cezanne) and one face turned toward the object ( the "fact, " the place, the event) . Or rather, it has no faces at all, it is both things indissolubly, it is Being-in-thc-World, as the phenomeno34 Painting and Sensation logists say: at one and the same time I become in the sensation and something happens through the sensation, one through the other, one in the other. 1 And at the limit, it is the same body which, being both subject and object, gives and receives the sensation. As a spectator, I experience the sensation only by entering the painting, by reaching the unity of the sensing and the sensed. This was Cezanne's lesson against the Impressionists: sensation is not in the "free" or disembodied play of light and color ( impressions) ; on the contrary, it is in the body, even the body of an apple. Color is in the body, sensation is in the body, and not in the air. Sensation is what is painted. What is painted on the canvas is the body, not insofar as it is represented as an object, but insofar as it is experienced as sustaining this sensation (what Lawrence, speaking of Cezanne, called " the appleyness of the apple") .2 This is the very general thread that links Bacon to Cezanne: paint the sensation, O f , as Bacon will say in words very close to Cezanne's, record the fact. :l "It is a very, very close and difficult thing to know why some paint comes across directly onto the nervous system and other paint tells you the story in a long diatribe through the brain."4 There would seem to be only obvious differences between these two painters: Cezanne's world as landscape and still life (even before the portraits, which are treated as landscapes) versus Bacon' s inverted hierarchy that dismisses still lifes and landscapes;*l the world as Nature in Cezanne versus the world as artifact in Bacon. But precisely, are not these obvious differences in the service of "sensation" and " temperament"? In other words, are they not inscribed in what links Bacon to Cezanne, in 35 Francis Bacon what they have in common? When Bacon speaks of sensation, he says two things, which are very similar to Cezanne. Negatively, he says that the form related to the sensation ( the Figure) is the opposite of the form related to an object that it is supposed to represent (figuration) . As Valery put it, sensation is that which is transmitted directly, and avoids the detour and boredom of convey- ing a story.6 And positively, Bacon constantly says that sensation is what passes from one "order" to another, from one "level" to another, from one "area" to another. This is why sensation is the master of deformations, the agent of bodily deformations. In this regard, the same criticism can be made against both figurative painting and abstract painting: they pass through the brain, they do not act directly upon the nervous system, they do not attain the sensation, they do not liberate the Figure all because they remain at one and the same levef.7 They can implement transformations of form, but they cannot attain deformations of bodies. In what sense Bacon is Cezanne an, even more so than if he were a disciple of Cezanne, we will have occasion to consider later. What does Bacon mean when, throughout the inter- views, he speaks of "orders of sensation," " levels of feeling," "areas of sensation," or "shifting sequences"?8 At first, one might think that each order, level, or area corresponds to a specific sensation: each sensation would thus be a term in a sequence or a series. For example, the series of Rembrandt's self-portraits involves us in different areas of feeling.9 And it is true that painting, and especially Bacon's painting, proceeds through series: series of crucifixions, series of Popes, series of self- portraits, series of the mouth, of the mouth that screams, 36 Painting and Sensation the mouth that smiles . . . . Moreover, there can be series of simultaneity, as in the triptychs, which make at least three levels or orders coexist. And the series can be closed, when it has a contrasting composition, but it can be open, when it is continued or continuable beyond the three. 1O All this is true. But it would not be true were there not something else as well, something that is already at work in each painting, each Figure, each sensation. It is each painting, each Figure, that is itself a shifting sequence or series (and not simply a term in a series) ; it is each sensation that exists at diverse levels, in different orders, or in different domains. This means that there are not sensations of different orders, but different orders of one and the same sensation. It is the nature of sensation to envelop a constitutive difference of level, a plurality of constituting domains. Every sensation, and every Figure, is already an "accumulated" or "coagulated" sensation, as in a limestone figure. I I Hence the irreducibly synthetic character of sensation. What then, we must ask, is the source of this synthetic character, through which each material sensation has several levels, several orders or domains? What are these levels, and what makes up their sensing or sensed unity? A first response must obviously be rejected. What makes up the material synthetic unity of a sensation would be the represented object, the figured thing. This is theoretically impossible, since the Figure is opposed to figuration. But even if we observe practically, as Bacon does, that something is nonetheless figured (for instance, a screaming Pope ) , this secondary figuration depends on the neutralization of all primary figuration. Bacon himself formulates this problem, which concerns the 37 Francis Bacon inevitable preservation of a practical figuration at the very moment when the Figure asserts its intention to break away from the figurative. We will see how he resolves the problem. In any case, Bacon has always tried to eliminate the "sensational", that is, the primary figuration of that which provokes a violent sensation. This is the meaning of the formula, "I wanted to paint the scream more than the horror." 1 2 When he paints the screaming Pope, there is nothing that might cause horror, and the curtain in front of the Pope is not only a way of isolating him, of shielding him from view; i t is rather the way in which the Pope himself sees nothing, and screams before the invisible. Thus neutralized, the horror is multi- plied because it is inferred from the scream, and not the reverse. And certainly it is not easy to renounce the horror, or the primary figuration. Sometimes he has to turn against his own instincts, renounce his own experience. Bacon harbors within himself all the violence of Ireland, and the violence of Nazism, the violence of war. He passes through the horror of the crucifixions, and especially the fragment of the crucifixion, or the head of meat, or the bloody suitcase. But when he passes judgment on his own paintings, he rejects all those that are still too "sensational ," because the figuration that subsists in them reconstitutes a scene of horror, even if only secondarily, thereby reintroducing a story to be told: even the bullfights are too dramatic. As soon as there is horror, a story is reintroduced, and the scream is botched . In the end, the maximum violence will be found in the seated or crouching Figures, which are subjected to neither torture nor brutality, to which nothing visible happens, and yet which manifest the power of the paint 38 Painting and Sensation all the more . This is because violence has two very different meanings: "When talking about the violence of paint, it's nothing to do with the violence of war. " 1 3 The violence of sensation is opposed to the violence of the represented ( the sensational, the cliche ) . The former is inseparable from its direct action on the nervous system, the levels through which i t passes, the domains it traverses: being itself a Figure, it must have nothing of the nature of a represented object. I t is the same with Artaud: cruelty is not what one believes it to be, and depends less and less on what is represented. A second interpretation must also be rejected, which would confuse the levels of sensation that is, the valencies of the sensation with an ambivalence of feeling. At one point, Sylvester suggests, "since you talk about recording different levels of feeling in one image . . . you may be expressing at one and the same time a love of the person and a hostility towards them . . . both a caress and an assault?" To which Bacon responds, "That is too logical. I don ' t think that's the way things work. I think i t goes to a deeper thing: how do I feel I can make this image more immediately real to myself? That's all ." 14 I n fact, the psychoanalytic hypothesis of ambivalence not only has the disadvantage of localizing the ambivalence on the side of the spectator who looks at the painting; for even if we presuppose an ambivalence in the Figure itself, it would refer to feelings that the Figure would experience in relation to represented things, in relation to a narrated story. But there are no feelings in Bacon: there are nothing but affects; that is, "sensations" and "instincts, " according to the formula of naturalism. Sensation is what determines instinct at a particular moment, just as 39 Francis Bacon instinct is the passage from one sensation to another, the search for the "best" sensation (not the most agreeable sensation, but the one that fills the flesh at a particular moment of its descent, contraction, or dilation) . There is a third, more interesting, hypothesis. This would be the motor hypothesis. The levels of sensation would be like arrests or snapshots of motion, which would recompose the movement synthetically in all its con- tinuity, speed, and violence, as in synthetic cubism, futurism, or Duchamp's Nude [ 1 02] . It is true that Bacon is fascinated by the decomposition of movement in Muybridge, which he has used as a subject matter. It is also true that he obtains very intense and violent movements of his own [39] , such as George Dyer's 1 80 degree turn of the head toward Lucian Freud [42] . More generally, Bacon's Figures are often frozen in the middle of a strange stroll [68] , as in Man Carrying a Child [22] or the Van Gogh [23] . The round area or the parallelepiped that isolates the Figure itself becomes a motor, and Bacon has not abandoned the project that a mobile sculpture could achieve more easily: in this case, the contour or pedestal would slide along the length of the armature so that the Figure could make its "daily round." l S But it is precisely the nature of this daily round that can inform us of the status of movement in Bacon. Beckett and Bacon have never been so close, and this daily round is the kind of stroll typical of Beckett's characters: they too trundle about fitfully without ever leaving their circle or parallelepiped. It is the stroll of the paralytic child and its mother clinging to the edge of the balustrade in a curious race for the handicapped [36] . It is the about-face in Turning Figure [30] . It is George Dyer's bicycle ride 40 Painting and Sensation [40] , which closely resembles that of Moritz's hero: "his vision was limited to the small piece of land he could see about him . . . . To him, the end of all things seemed to lead, at the end of his journey, to just such a point . . . . " 1 6 Therefore, even when the contour is displaced, the movement consists less of this displacement than the amoeba-like exploration that the Figure is engaged in inside the contour. Movement does not explain sensation; on the contrary, it is explained by the elasticity of the sensation, its vis elastica. According to Beckett's or Kafka's law, there is immobility beyond movement: beyond standing up, there is sitting down, and beyond sitting down, lying down, beyond which one finally dissipates. The true acrobat is one who is consigned to immobility inside the circle. The large feet of the Figures often do not lend themselves to walking: they are almost clubfeet (and the large armchairs often seem to resemble shoes for clubfeet) . In short, it is not movement that explains the levels of sensation, it is the levels of sensation that explain what remains of movement. And in fact, what interests Bacon is not exactly movement, although his painting makes movement very intense and violent . But in the end, it is a movement "in-place," a spasm, which reveals a completely different problem characteristic of Bacon: the action of invisible forces on the body ( hence the bodily deformations, which are due to this more profound cause) . In the 1 973 triptych [73] , the movement of translation occurs between two spasms, between the two movements of a contraction in one place. Then there would be yet another hypothesis, more "phenomenological ." The levels of sensation would really be domains of sensation that refer to the different sense 41 Francis Bacon organs; but precisely each level, each domain would have a way of referring to the others, independently of the represented object they have in common. Between a color, a taste, a touch, a smell, a noise, a weight, there would be an existential communication that would constitute the "pathic" (nonrepresentative) moment of the sensation. In Bacon's bullfights, for example, we hear the noise of the beast's hooves [56, 57 ] ; in the 1 976 triptych, we touch the quivering of the bird plunging into the place where the head should be [79] , and each time meat is represented, we touch it, smell it, eat it, weigh it, as in Sou tine's work; and the portrait of Isabel Rawsthorne [4 1 ] causes a head to appear to which ovals and traits have been added in order to widen the eyes, flair the nostrils, lengthen the mouth, and mobilize the skin in a common exercise of all the organs at once. The painter would thus make visible a kind of original unity of the senses, and would make a multisensible Figure appear visually. But this operation is possible only if the sensation of a particular domain (here, the visual sensation) is in direct contact with a vital power that exceeds every domain and traverses them all. This power is rhythm, which is more profound than vision, hearing, etc. Rhythm appears as music when it invests the auditory level, and as painting when it invests the visual level. This is a "logic of the senses," as Cezanne said, which is neither rational nor cerebral. What is ultimate is thus the relation between sensation and rhythm, which places in each sensation the levels and domains through which it passes. This rhythm runs through a painting just as it runs through a piece of music. I t is diastole-systole: the world that seizes me by 42 Painting and Sensation closing in around me, the self that opens to the world and opens the world itself. 1 7 Cezanne, it is said, is the painter who put a vital rhythm into the visual sensation. Must we say the same thing of Bacon, with his coexistent move- ments, when the flat field closes in around the Figure and when the Figure contracts or, on the contrary, expands in order to rejoin the field, to the point where the Figure merges with the field? Could it be that Bacon's closed and artificial world reveals the same vital movement as Cezanne's Nature? Bacon is not using empty words when he declares that he is cerebrally pessimistic but nervously optimistic, with an optimism that believes only in life . l s The same "temperament" as Cezanne? Bacon's formula would be: figuratively pessimistic, but figurally optimistic. 43 Chapter 7 Hysteria The body without organs: Artaud � Worringer's Gothic line � What the "difference of /evei" in sensation means � Vibration �Hysteria and presence � Bacon's doubt � Hysteria, painting, and the eye This ground, this rhythmic unity of the senses, can be discovered only by going beyond the organism. The phenomenological hypothesis is perhaps insufficient because it merely invokes the lived body. But the lived body is still a paltry thing in comparison with a more profound and almost unlivable Power [Puissance] . We can seek the unity of rhythm only at the point where rhythm itself plunges into chaos, into the night, at the point where the differences of level are perpetually and violently mixed . Beyond the organism, but also at the limit of the lived body, there lies what Artaud discovered and named : the body without organs. "The body is the body I it stands alone I it has no need of organs I the body is never an organism I organisms are the enemies of bodies ." l The body without organs is opposed less to organs than to that organization of organs we call an organism. It is an intense and intensive body. It is traversed by a wave that traces levels or thresholds in the body according to the 44 Hysteria variations of its amplitude. Thus the body does not have organs, but thresholds or levels. Sensation is not qualitative and qualified, but has only an intensive reality, which no longer determines with i tself represent- ative elements, but allotropic variations. Sensation is vibration. We know that the egg reveals just this state of the body "before" organic representation: axes and vectors, gradients, zones, cinematic movements, and dynamic tendencies, in relation to which forms are contingent or accessory. "No mouth. No tongue. No teeth. No larynx. No esophagus. No belly. No anus. " It is a whole nonorganic life, for the organism is not life, it is what imprisons life. The body is completely living, and yet nonorganic. Likewise sensation, when it acquires a body through the organism, takes on an excessive and spasmodic appearance, exceeding the bounds of organic activity. It is immediately conveyed in the flesh through the nervous wave or vital emotion. Bacon and Artaud meet on many points: the Figure is the body without organs (dismantle the organism in favor of the body, the face in favor of the head ) ; the body without organs is flesh and nerve; a wave flows through it and traces levels upon it; a sensation is produced when the wave encounters the forces acting on the body, an "affective athleticism," a scream-breath. When sensation is linked to the body in this way, it ceases to be representative and becomes real; and cruelty will be linked less and less to the representation of something horrible, and will become nothing other than the action of forces upon the body, or sensation ( the opposite of the sensational) . As opposed to a miserabiliste painter who paints parts of organs, Bacon has not ceased to paint bodies without organs, the intensive fact of the 45 Francis Bacon body. The scrubbed and brushed parts of the canvas arc, in Bacon, parts of a neutralized organism, restored to their state of zones or levels: "the human visage has not yet found its face . . . . " A powerful non organic life: this is how W orringer defined Gothic art, " the northern Gothic line. "2 It is opposed in principle to the organic representation of classical art. Classical art can be figurative, insofar as i t refers to something represented, but i t can also be abstract, when i t extricates a geometric form from the representation. But the pictorial line in Gothic painting is completely different, as is i ts geometry and figure. First of all, this line is decorative; it lies at thc surface, but it is a material decoration that does not outline a form. I t is a geometry no longer in the service of the essential and eternal, but a geometry in the service of "problems" or "accidents," ablation, adjunction, projection, intersec- tion. It is thus a line that never ceases to change direction, that is broken, split, diverted, turned in on itself, coiled up, or even extended beyond its natural limits, dying away in a "disordered convulsion" : there are free marks that extend or arrest the line, acting beneath or beyond representation. It is thus a geometry or a decoration that has become vital and profound, on the condition that it is no longer organic: it elevates mechanical forces to sensible intuition, it works through violent movements. If it encounters the animal, if it becomes animalized, it is not by outlining a form, but on the contrary by imposing, through its clarity and nonorganic precision, a zone where forms become indiscernible. I t also attests to a high spirituality, since what leads it to seek the elementary forces beyond the organic is a spiritual will . But this 46 Hysteria spirituality is a spirituality of the body; the spirit is the body itself, the body without organs . . . . (The first Figure of Bacon would be that of a Gothic decorator) . Life provides many ambiguous approaches to the body wi thou t organs (alcohol, drugs, schizophrenia, sado- masochism, and so on) . But can the living reality of this body be named "hysteria," and if so, in what sense? A wave with a variable amplitude flows through the body without organs; it traces zones and levels on this body according to the variations of its amplitude. When the wave encounters external forces at a particular level, a sensation appears. An organ will be determined by this encounter, but it is a provisional organ that endures only as long as the passage of the wave and the action of the force, and which will be displaced in order to be posited elsewhere. "No organ is constant as regards either function or position . . . sex organs sprout anywhere . . . rectums open, defecate and close . . . the entire organism changes color and consistency in split-second adjust- ments."3 In fact, the body without organs does not lack organs, it simply lacks the organism, that is, this particular organization of organs. The body without organs is thus defined by an indeterminate organ, whereas the organism is defined by determinate organs: " Instead of a mouth and an anus to get out of order why not have one all-purpose hole to eat and eliminate? We could seal up nose and mouth, fill in the stomach, make an air hole direct into the lungs where it should have been in the first place."4 But what does it mean to speak of a polyvalent orifice or an indeterminate organ? Are not a mouth and an anus very distinct, and is not a passage of time needed to get from one to the other? Even in the meat, is not 47 Francis Bacon there a very distinct mouth, recognizable through its teeth, which cannot be confused with other organs? This is what must be understood : the wave flows through the body; at a certain level, an organ will be determined depending on the force it encounters; and this organ will change if the force itself changes, or if it moves to another level. In short, the body without organs is not defined by the absence of organs, nor is it defined solely by the existence of an indeterminate organ; it is finally defined by the temporary and provisional presence of determinate organs. This is one way of introducing time into the painting, and there is a great force of time in Bacon, time itself is being painted. The variation of texture and color on a body, a head, or a back (as in Three Studies rifthe Male Back of 1 970 [63] ) is actually a temporal variation regulated down to the tenth of a second. Hence the chromatic treatment of the body, which is very different from the treatment of the fields of color: the chronochro- matism of the body is opposed to the monochromatism of the flat fields. To put time inside the Figure this is the force of bodies in Bacon: the large male back as variation. We can see from this how every sensation implies a difference of level (of order, of domain) , and moves from one level to another. Even the phenomenological unity did not give an account of it . But the body without organs does give an account of it, if we look at the complete series: without organs to the indeterminate polyvalent organ to temporary and transitory organs. What is a mouth at one level becomes an anus at another level, or at the same level under the action of different forces. Now this complete series constitutes the hysterical reality of the body. If we look at the "picture" of hysteria that was 48 Hysteria formed in the nineteenth century, in psychiatry and elsewhere, we find a number of features that have continually animated Bacon's bodies. First of all, there are the famous spastics and paralytics, the hyperesthetics or anesthetics, associated or alternating, sometimes fixed and sometimes migrant, depending on the passage of the nervous wave and the zones i t invests or withdraws from. Then there are the phenomena of precipitation and anticipation or, on the contrary, of delay (hysteresis) , of the afterward, which depend on the accelerations and delays of the wave's oscillations. Next, there is the transitory character of the organ's determination, which depends on the forces that are exerted upon it. Next, there is the direct action of these forces on the nervous system, as if the hysteric were a sleepwalker, a somnambulist in the waking state, a "Vigilambulist ." Finally, there is a very peculiar feeling that arises from within the body, precisely because the body is fel t under the body, the transitory organs are felt under the organization of the fixed organs. Furthermore, this body without organs and these transitory organs are themselves seen, in phenomena known as internal or external "autoscopia": it is no longer rrry head, but I feel myself inside a head, I see and I see myself inside a head; or else I do not see myself in the mirror, but I feel myself in the body that I see, and I see myself in this naked body when I am dressed . . . and so forth .�) Is there a psychosis in the world that might include this hysterical condition? "A kind of incomprehensible stopping place in the spirit, right in the middle of everything . . . "6 Beckett's Characters and Bacon's Figures share a common setting, the same Ireland: the round area, the 49 Francis Bacon isolator, the Depopulator; the series of spastics and paralytics inside the round area; the stroll of the Vigilambulator; the presence of the attendant, who still feels, sees, and speaks; the way the body escapes from itself; that is, the way it escapes from the organism . . . . I t escapes from itself through the open mouth, through the anus or the stomach, or through the throat, or through the circle of the washbasin, or through the point of the umbrella.7 The presence of a body without organs under the organism, the presence of transitory organs under organic representation. A clothed Figure of Bacon's is seen nude in the mirror or on the canvas ( Two Studies for a Portrait of George Dyer, 1 968 [50] ) . The spastics and the hyperesthetics are often indicated by wiped or scrubbed zones [7 1 ] , and the anesthetics and paralytics, by missing zones (as in the very detailed 1 972 triptych [70] ) . Above all, we will see that Bacon's whole "style" takes place in a beforehand and an afterward : what takes place before the painting has even begun, but also what takes place afterward, a hysteresis that will break off the work each time, interrupt its figurative course, and yet give it back afterward . . . . Presence, presence . . . this is the first word that comes to mind in front of one of Bacon's paintings.s Could this presence be hysterical? The hysteric is at the same time someone who imposes his or her presence, but also someone for whom things and beings are present, too present, and who attributes to every thing and commun- icates to every being this excessive presence. There is therefore little difference between the hysteric, the "hystericized," and the "hystericizor." Bacon explains rather testily that the hysterical smile he painted on the 50 Hysteria 1 953 portrait [ 1 1 ] , on the human head of 1 953 [ 1 3] , and on the 1 955 Pope [ 1 9] came from a "model" who was "very neurotic and almost hysterical."9 But in fact it is the whole painting that is hystericized. Bacon himself hystericizes when, beforehand, he abandons himself completely to the image, abandons his entire head to the camera of a photobooth, or rather, sees himself in a head that belongs to the camera, that has disappeared into the camera. What is this hysterical smile? Where is the abomination or abjection of this smile? Presence or insistence. Interminable presence. The insistence of the smile beyond the face and beneath the face. The insistence of a scream that survives the mouth, the insistence of a body that survives the organism, the insistence of transitory organs that survive the qualified organs. And in this excessive presence, the identity of an already-there and an always-delayed. Everywhere there is a presence acting directly on the nervous system, which makes representation, whether in place or at a distance, impossible. Sartre meant nothing less when he called himself a hysteric, and spoke of Flaubert's hysteria. !O What kind of hysteria are w e speaking of here? I s i t the hysteria of Bacon himself, or of the painter, or of the painting itself, or of painting in general? It is true that there are numerous dangers in constructing a clinical aesthetic (which nonetheless has the advantage of not being a psychoanalysis) . And why refer specifically to painting, when we could invoke so many writers or even musicians (Schumann and the contraction of the finger, the audition of the voice . . . ) ? What we are suggesting, in effect, is that there is a special relation between painting and hysteria. It is very simple . Painting directly attempts 51 Francis Bacon to release the presences beneath representation, beyond representation. The color system itself is a system of direct action on the nervous system. This is not a hysteria of the painter, but a hysteria of painting. With painting, hysteria becomes art. Or rather, with the painter, hysteria becomes painting. What the hysteric is incapable of doing a little art is accomplished in painting. I t must also be said that the painter is not hysterical, in the sense of a negation in negative theology. Abjection becomes splendor, the horror of life becomes a very pure and very intense life. "Life is frightening," said Cezanne, but in this cry he had already given voice to all the joys of line and color. Painting transmutes this cerebral pessim- ism into nervous optimism. Painting is hysteria, or converts hysteria, because it makes presence immediately visible. It invests the eye through color and line. But it does not treat the rye as a fixed organ . It liberates lines and colors from their representative function, but at the same time it also liberates the eye from its adherence to the organism, from its character as a fixed and qualified organ: the eye becomes virtually the polyvalent indeterm- inate organ that sees the body without organs (the Figure) as a pure presence. Painting gives us eyes all over: in the ear, in the stomach, in the lungs ( the painting breathes . . . ) . This is the double definition of painting: subjectively, it invests the eye, which ceases to be organic in order to become a polyvalent and transitory organ; objectively, it brings before us the reality of a body, of lines and colors freed from organic representation . And each is produced by the other: the pure presence of the body becomes visible at the same time that the eye becomes the destined organ of this presence. 52 Hysteria Painting has two ways of avoiding this fundamental hysteria: either by conserving the figurative coordinates of organic representation, even if that means using them in very subtle ways or making these liberated presences or unorganized bodies pass beneath or between these coordinates; or else by turning toward abstract form, and inventing a properly pictorial cerebrality ( "reviving" painting in this direction) . Velasquez was undoubtedly the wisest of the classical painters, possessing an immense wisdom: he created his extraordinary audacities by holding firmly to the coordinates of representation, by assuming completely the role of a documentarian . . . . 1 1 What is Bacon's relation to Velasquez, and why does he claim him as his master? Why, when he speaks of his versions of the portrait of Pope Innocent X, does he express his doubt and discontent? In a way, Bacon has hystericized all the elements of Velasquez's painting. We cannot simply compare the two portraits of Innocent X, that of Velasquez and that of Bacon, who transforms it into the screaming Pope. We must compare Velasquez's portrait with all of Bacon's paintings. In Velasquez, the armchair already delineates the prison of the parallel- epiped; the heavy curtain in back is already tending to move up front, and the mantelet has aspects of a side of beef; an unreadable yet clear parchment is in the hand, and the attentive, fixed eye of the Pope already sees something invisible looming up [ 1 1 2] . But all of this is strangely restrained; it is something that is going to happen, but has not yet acquired the ineluctable, irrepressible presence of Bacon's newspapers, the almost animal-like armchairs, the curtain up front, the brute meat, and the screaming mouth. Should these presences 53 Francis Bacon have been let loose? asks Bacon. Were not things better, infinitely better, in Velasquez? In refusing both the figurative path and the abstract path, was it necessary to display this relationship between hysteria and painting in full view? While our eye is enchanted with the two Innocent Xs, Bacon questions himself. 1 2 But in the end, why should all this be peculiar to painting? Can we speak of a hysterical essence of painting, under the rubric of a purely aesthetic clinic, independent of any psychiatry and psychoanalysis? Why could not music also extricate pure presences, but through an ear that has become the polyvalent organ for sonorous bodies? And why not poetry or theater, when i t is those of Artaud or Beckett? This problem concerning the essence of each art, and possibly their clinical essence, is less difficult than it seems to be. Certainly music traverses our bodies in profound ways, putting an ear in the stomach, in the lungs, and so on. I t knows all about waves and nervousness. But it involves our body, and bodies in general, in another element. I t strips bodies of their inertia, of the materiality of their presence: it disembodies bodies. We can thus speak with exactitude of a sonorous body, and even of a bodily combat in music � for example, in a motif � but as Proust said, it is an immaterial and disembodied combat "in which there subsists not one scrap of inert matter refractory to the mind ." 1 3 I n a sense, music begins where painting ends, and this is what is meant when one speaks of the superiority of music. It is lodged on lines of flight that pass through bodies, but which find their consistency elsewhere, whereas painting is lodged farther up, where the body escapes from itself. But in escaping, the body 54 Hysteria discovers the materiali ty of which it is composed, the pure presence of which it is made, and which it would not discover otherwise. Painting, in short, discovers the material reality of bodies with its line-color systems and its polyvalent organ, the eye. "Our eye," said Gauguin, "insatiable and in heat." The adventure of painting is that it is the eye alone that can attend to material existence or material presence even that of an apple. When music sets up its sonorous system and its polyvalent organ, the ear, it addresses itself to something very different than the material reality of bodies. I t gives a disembodied and dematerialized body to the most spiritual of entities: "The beats of the timpani in the Requiem are sharp, majestic, and divine, and they can only announce to our surprised ears the coming of a being who, to use Stendahl's words, surely has relations with another world ." 1 4 This is why music does not have hysteria as its clinical essence, but is confronted more and more with a galloping schizophrenia. To hystericize music we would have to reintroduce colors, passing through a rudimentary or refined system of correspond- ence between sounds and colors. 55 Chapter 8 Painting Forces Rendering the invisible: the problem of painting Deformation: neither transformation nor decomposition The scream Bacon's love of life Enumeration of forces From another point of view, the question concerning the separation of the arts, their respective autonomy, and their possible hierarchy, loses all importance. For there is a community of the arts, a common problem. In art, and in painting as in music, it is not a matter of reproducing or inventing forms, but of capturing forces. For this reason no art is figurative. Paul Klee's famous formula - "Not to render the visible, but to render visible" means nothing else. The task of painting is defined as the attempt to render visible forces that are not themselves visible. Likewise, music attempts to render sonorous forces that are not themselves sonorous. That much is clear. Force is closely related to sensation: for a sensation to exist, a force must be exerted on a body, on a point of the wave. But if force is the condition of sensation, it is nonetheless not the force that is sensed, since the sensation "gives" something completely different from the forces that condition i t . How will sensation be able to sufficiently turn in on i tself, relax or contract i tself, so 56 Painting Forces as to capture these nongiven forces in what it gives us, to make us sense these insensible forces, and raise itself to i ts own conditions? I t is in this way that music must render nonsonorous forces sonorous, and painting must render invisible forces visible. Sometimes these are the same thing: Time, which is nonsonorous and invisible how can time be painted, how can time be heard? And elementary forces like pressure, inertia, weight, attrac- tion, gravitation, germination how can they be rendered? Sometimes, on the contrary, the insensible force of one art instead seems to take part in the "givens" of another art: for example, how to paint sound, or even the scream? (And conversely, how to make colors audible?) This is a problem of which painters are very conscious. When pious critics criticized Millet for painting peasants who were carrying an offertory like a sack of potatoes, Millet responded by saying that the weight common to the two objects was more profound than their figurative distinction. As a painter, he was striving to paint the force of that weight, and not the offertory or the sack of potatoes. And was it not Cezanne's genius to have subordinated all the techniques of painting to this task: rendering visible the folding force of mountains, the germinative force of a seed, the thermic force of a landscape, and so on? And Van Gogh: Van Gogh even invented unknown forces, the unheard-of force of a sunflower seed. For many painters, however, the problem of capturing jorces, no matter how conscious it may have been, was mixed with another problem, equally import- ant but less pure. This other problem was the decomposition and recomposition oj eJJects: for example, the decomposition 5 7 Francis Bacon and recomposltlon of depth in the Renaissance, the decomposition and recomposition of colors in impression- ism, the decomposition and recomposition of movement in cubism. We can see how one problem leads to the other, since movement, for example, is an effect that refers both to a unique force that produces it, and to a multiplicity of decomposable and recomposable elements beneath this force. Bacon's Figures seem to be one of the most marvelous responses in the history of painting to the question, How can one make invisible forces visible? This is the primary function of the Figures. In this respect, we will see that Bacon remains relatively indifferent to the problem of effects . Not that he despises them, but he thinks that, in the whole history which is that of painting, they have been adequately mastered by the painters he admires, particularly the problem of movement, of "rendering" movement. J But if this is the case, it is reason enough to confront even more directly the problem of "rendering" invisible forces visible. This is true of all Bacon's series of heads and the series of self-portraits, and it is even the reason he made these series [34, 48, 49, 54] : the extraordinary agitation of these heads is derived not from a movement that the series would supposedly reconstitute, but rather from the forces of pressure, dilation, contraction, flattening, and elongation that are exerted on the immobile head . They are like the forces of the cosmos confronting an intergalactic traveler immobile in his capsule. It is as if invisible forces were striking the head from many different angles. The wiped and swept parts of the face here take on a new meaning, because they mark the zone where the force is in the process of 58 Painting Forces striking. This is why the problems Bacon faces are indeed those of deformation, and not transformation. These are two very different categories. The transformation of form can be abstract or dynamic . But deformation is always bodily, and it is static, it happens at one place; it subordinates movement to force, but it also subordinates the abstract to the Figure. When a force is exerted on a scrubbed part, it does not give birth to an abstract form, nor does it combine sensible forms dynamically: on the contrary, it turns this zone into a zone of indiscernibility that is common to several forms, irreducible to any of them; and the lines of force that it creates escape every form through their very clarity, through their deforming precision (we saw this in the becoming-animal of the Figures) . Cezanne was perhaps the first to have made deformations without transformation, by making truth fall back on the body. Here again Bacon is Cezannean: for both Bacon and Cezanne, the deformation is obtained in the form at rest; and at the same time, the whole material environment, the structure, begins to stir: "walls twitch and slide, chairs bend or rear up a little, cloths curl like burning paper. . . . "2 Everything is now related to forces, everything is force. It is force that constitutes deformation as an act of painting: it lends itself neither to a transformation of form, nor to a decomposition of elements. And Bacon's deformations are rarely con- strained or forced ; they are not tortures, despite appearances. On the contrary, they are the most natural postures of a body that has been reorganized by the simple force being exerted upon it: the desire to sleep, to vomit, to turn over, to remain seated as long as possible . . . . 59 Francis Bacon We must consider the special case of the scream. Why does Bacon think of the scream as one of the highest objects of painting? "Paint the scream . . . " [ 1 6, 24] . It is not at all a matter of giving color to a particularly intense sound . Music, for i ts part, is faced with the same task, which is certainly not to render the scream harmonious, but to establish a relationship between the sound of the scream and the forces that sustain it. In the same manner, painting will establish a relationship between these forces and the visible scream ( the mouth that screams) . But the forces that produce the scream, that convulse the body until they emerge at the mouth as a scrubbed zone, must not be confused with the visible spectacle before which one screams, nor even with the perceptible and sensible objects whose action decomposes and recomposes our pain. If we scream, it is always as victims of invisible and insensible forces that scramble every spectacle, and that even lie beyond pain and feeling. This is what Bacon means when he says he wanted "to paint the scream more than the horror."3 If we could express this as a dilemma, i t would be: either I paint the horror and I do not paint the scream, because I make a figuration of the horrible; or else I paint the scream, and I do not paint the visible horror, I will paint the visible horror less and less, since the scream captures or detects an invisible force.4 Alban Berg knew how to make music out of the scream in the scream of Marie, and then in the very different scream of Lulu. But in both cases, he established a relationship between the sound of the scream and inaudible forces: those of the earth in the horizontal scream of Marie, and those of heaven in the vertical scream of Lulu. Bacon creates the painting of the scream because he establishes a 60 Painting Forces relationship between the visibility of the scream ( the open mouth as a shadowy abyss) and invisible forces, which are nothing other than the forces of the future. I t was Kafka who spoke of detecting the diabolical powers of the future knocking at the door." Every scream contains them potentially. Innocent X screams, but he screams behind the curtain, not only as someone who can no longer be seen, but as someone who cannot see, who has nothing left to see, whose only remaining function is to render visible these invisible forces that are making him scream, these powers of the fu ture. This is what is expressed in the phrase "to scream at" not to scream b�fore or about, but to scream at death-which suggests this coupling of forces, the perceptible force of the scream and the imperceptible force that makes one scream. This is all very curious, but it is a source of extraordinary vi tali ty. When Bacon dis tinguishes between two violences, that of the spectacle and that of sensation, and declares that the first must be renounced to reach the second, it is a kind of declaration of faith in life. The interviews contain many statements of this sort. Bacon says that he himself is cerebrally pessimistic; that is, he can scarcely see anything but horrors to paint, the horrors of the world. But he is nervously optimistic, because visible figuration is secondary in painting, and will have less and less importance: Bacon will reproach himself for painting too much horror, as if that were enough to leave the figurative behind; he moves more and more toward a Figure without horror. But why is i t an act of vital faith to choose "the scream more than the horror," the violence of sensation more than the violence of the spectacle? The invisible forces, the powers of the 6 1 Francis Bacon future are they not already upon us, and much more insurmountable than the worst spectacle and even the worst pain? Yes, in a certain sense every piece of meat testifies to this. But in another sense, no. When, like a wrestler, the visible body confronts the powers of the invisible, it gives them no other visibility than its own. I t i s within this visibility that the body actively struggles, affirming the possibility of triumphing, which was beyond its reach as long as these powers remained invisible, hidden in a spectacle that sapped our strength and diverted us. It is as if combat had now become possible. The struggle with the shadow is the only real struggle. When the visual sensation confronts the invisible force that conditions i t , it releases a force that is capable of vanquishing the invisible force, or even befriending it . Life screams at death, but death is no longer this all-too- visible thing that makes us faint; it is this invisible force that life detects, flushes out, and makes visible through the scream. Death is judged from the point of view of life, and not the reverse, as we like to believe.6 Bacon, no less than Beckett, is one of those artists who, in the name of a very intense life, can call for an even more intense life. He is not a painter who "believes" in death. His is indeed a figurative miserabilisme, but one that serves an increasingly powerful Figure of life. The same homage should be paid to Bacon as can be paid to Beckett or Kafka. In the very act of "representing" horror, mutilation, prosthesis, fall or failure, they have erected indomitable Figures, indomitable through both their insistence and their presence. They have given life a new and extremely direct power of laughter. Since the visible movements of the Figures are 62 Painting Forces subordinated to the invisible forces exerted upon them, we can go behind the movements to these forces, and make an empirical list of the forces Bacon detects and captures. Although Bacon likens himself to a "pulverizer" or a "grinder," he is really more like a detective. The first invisible forces are those of isolation: they are supported by the fields, and become visible when they wrap themselves around the contour and wrap the fields around the Figure. The second are the forces of deformation, which seize the Figure's body and head, and become visible whenever the head shakes off its face, or the body i ts organism. (Bacon knows how to "render" intensely, for example, the flattening force of sleep [53, 76] ) . The third are the forces of dissipation, when the Figure fades away and returns to the field : what then renders these forces visible is a strange smile. But there are still many other forces. What can be said, first of all, of that invisible force of coupling that sweeps over two bodies with an extraordinary energy, but which they render visible by extracting from it a kind of polygon or diagram? And beyond that, what is the mysterious force that can only be captured or detected by triptychs? I t is at the same time a force (characteristic of light) that unites the whole, but also a force that separates the Figures and panels, a luminous separation that should not be confused with the preceding isolation. Can life, can time, be rendered sensible, rendered visible? To render time visible, to render the force of time visible Bacon seems to have done this twice. There is the force of changing time, through the allotropic variation of bodies, "down to the tenth of a second ," which involves deformation; and then there is the force of eternal time, 63 Francis Bacon the eternity of time, through the uniting-separating that reigns in the triptychs, a pure light. To render time sensible in itself is a task common to the painter, the musician, and sometimes the writer. It is a task beyond all measure or cadence. 64 Chapter 9 Couples and Triptychs Coupled Figures The battle and the coupling of sensation Resonance Rhythmic Figures -Amplitude and the three rhythms Two types of "matters of fact" I t is a characteristic of sensation to pass through different levels owing to the action of forces. But two sensations, each having their own level or zone, can also confront each other and make their respective levels communicate. Here we are no longer in the domain of simple vibration, but that of resonance. There are thus two Figures coupled together. Or rather, what is decisive is the coupling of sensations: there is one and the same matter if fact for two Figures, or even a single coupled Figure for two bodies. From the start, we have seen that, according to Bacon, the painter could not give up the idea of putting several Figures in the painting at the same time, although there was always the danger of reintroducing a "story" or falling back into narrative painting. The question thus concerns the possibility that there may exist relations between simultaneous Figures that are nonillustrative and non narrative (and not even logical) , and which could be called, precisely, "matters of fact." Such is indeed the case here, where the coupling of sensations from different levels creates the coupled Figure (and not 65 Francis Bacon the reverse) . What is painted is the sensation. There is a beauty to these entangled Figures [69] . They do not merge with each other, but are rendered indiscernible by the extreme precision of the lines, which acq uire a kind of autonomy in relation to the body, like a diagram whose lines would bring together nothing but sensations . ' There is one Figure common to two bodies, or one "fact" common to two Figures, without the slightest story being narrated [ 1 2 , 1 7 , 60, 6 1 ] . Bacon never stopped painting coupled Figures, either during his "malerisch" period or in the later works of clarity: crushed bodies, included in a single Figure, under a single force of coupling. Far from con tradicting the principle of isolation, the coupled Figure seems to make the isolated Figures simple particular cases. For even in cases where there is a single body or a simple sensation, the different levels through which this sensation passes already necessarily constitute couplings of sensation. Vibration already produces resonance. For example, the man under the umbrella of 1 946 [3] is a simple Figure, corresponding to the passage of sensations from top to bottom ( the meat above the umbrella) and from bottom to top ( the head seized by the umbrella) . But it is also a coupled Figure, corresponding to the confrontation of the sensations in the head and in the meat, to which the horrible falling smile bears witness. In the end, there are only coupled Figures in Bacon ( the Lying Figure in a Mirror of 1 9 7 1 [67] has to be unique; it counts as two Figures, i t is a veritable diagram of sensation) . Even the simple Figure is often coupled with its animal. At the beginning of his book on Bacon, John Russell invokes Proust and involuntary memory.2 Although 66 Couples and Triptychs Proust's world seems to have little in common with Bacon's ( though Bacon often invokes the involuntary ) , one still has the impression that Russell is correct. This is perhaps because Bacon, when he refuses the double way of a figurative painting and an abstract painting, is put in a situation analogous to that of Proust in literature. Proust did not want an abstract literature that was too voluntary (philosophy) , any more than he wanted a figurative, illustrative, or narrative literature that merely told a story. What he was striving for, what he wanted to bring to light, was a kind of Figure, torn away from figuration and stripped of every figurative function: a Figure-in-itself, for example, the Figure-in-itself of Comb ray. He himself spoke of "truths written with the help of figures."3 And if, in many cases, he resorted to involuntary memory, it was because it succeeded in making this pure Figure appear, as opposed to voluntary memory, which was content to illustrate or narrate the past. How, according to Proust, did involuntary memory operate? It coupled together two sensations that existed at different levels of the body, and that seized each other like two wrestlers, the present sensation and the past sensation, in order to make something appear that was irreducible to either of them, irreducible to the past as well as to the present: this Figure. And in the end, the fact that the two sensations were divided into present and past, and thus that it was an instance of memory, was of little importance. There were cases where the coupling of sensation, the imprint of sensations, made no appeal to memory; for instance, desire, or still more profoundly, art (Elstir's painting or Vinteuil's music ) . What mattered was the resonance of the two sensations when they seized 67 Francis Bacon each other, like the sensation of the violin and the sensation of the piano in the sonata. It was like the beginning of the world, as if there had been, as yet, only the two of them on Earth, or rather in this world closed to all the rest, constructed by the logic of a creator in such a way that in it no one else would ever exist except the two of them: this sonata.4 This is the Figure of the sonata, or the emergence of this sonata as a Figure. The same thing happens in the septet, where two motifs confront each other violently, each defined by a sensation, the one as a spiritual "calling," the other as a bodily "pain" or a "neuralgia." We are no longer concerned with the difference between music and painting. The important point is that the two sensations are coupled together like "wrestlers" and form a "combat of energies, " even if it is a disembodied combat, from which is extracted an ineffable essence, a resonance, an epiphany erected within the closed world .s Proust knew very well how to imprison things and people: he did so, he said, in order to capture their colors (Combray in a cup of tea, Albertine in a bedroom) . I n a curious passage, Bacon the portraitist says that he does not like to paint the dead, or people he does not know (since they have no flesh ) ; and those he knows, he does not like to have in front of his eyes. He prefers a current photograph and a recent memory, or rather the sensation of a current photograph and that of a recent impression: this is what makes the act of painting a kind of "recall ."6 But in fact it is not a question of memory (even less so than it was for Proust) . What matters is the confrontation of the two sensations, and the resonance 68 Couples and Triptychs tha t is derived from it. I t is like the wrestlers whose movement was decomposed by Muybridge's photo- graphs. It is not that everything is at war, embattled, as one might think from the viewpoint of a figurative pessimist. What produces the struggle or confrontation is the coupling of diverse sensations in two bodies, and not the reverse, so that the struggle is also the variable Figure of two bodies sleeping intertwined, or which desire mixes together, or which painting makes resonate. Sleeping, desire, art : these are places of confrontation and resonance, places of a struggle. Coupling or resonance is not the only development of the complex sensation. Coupled Figures frequently appear in the triptychs, particularly in the central panel. Yet we quickly realize that the coupling of sensation, important as it is, gives us no means of discovering the nature of a triptych, its function, and above all the relations that exist between its three parts. The triptych is undoubtedly the form in which the following demand is posed most precisely: there must be a relationship between the separated parts, but this relationship must be neither narrative nor logical. The triptych does not imply a progression, and it does not tell a story. Thus it too, in turn, has to incarnate a common fact for diverse Figures. I t has to produce a "matter of fact ." But the previous solution of coupling is of no use here, for the Figures are and remain separated in the triptych. They must remain separated, and do not resonate. There are therefore two types of nonnarrative relations, two types of "matters of fact" or common facts: the coupled Figure, and the separated Figures as parts of a triptych. But how can these latter Figures have a common fact? 69 Francis Bacon The same question could be asked apart from the triptychs. Bacon admires Cezanne's The Bathers [98] because several Figures are put together on the canvas, and yet they are not caught up in a "story."7 These Figures are separated, and not at all coupled: their inclusion on a single canvas must thus imply a common fact of a different type than the coupling of sensation. Consider a painting of Bacon's like the 1 963 Man and Child [32] : the two Figures, the contorted man sitting on the chair and the little girl standing stiffly, are separated by a whole region of the field that cuts an angle between the two. Russell comments: Is the girl standing in disgrace before her unforgiving father? Is she the man's jailor, outfacing him with folded arms as he writhes in his chair and looks the other way? Is she an abnormality, a physical freak returned to haunt him, or is he a man set on high, a judge who shall shortly pass sentence?' And he refuses each hypothesis in turn, for they would all introduce a narration into the painting. "We shall never know, and we shouldn' t even ask to know."8 Doubtless one could say that the painting is the possibility of all these hypotheses or narrations at the same time. But this is because the painting itself is beyond all narration. This is thus one case where the "matter of fact" cannot be a coupling of sensation, and must take into account the separation of Figures which are nonetheless united in the painting. The little girl seems to function as a "attend- ant ." But this attendant, as we have seen, does not signify an observer or a spectator-voyeur (although it might also be one from the point of view of a figuration that still 70 Couples and Triptychs remains, despite of everything) . More profoundly, the attendant only indicates a constant, a measure or cadence, in relation to which we can appraise a variation. This is why the girl is stiff like a stake, and seems to beat time with her clubfoot, while the man is seated in a double variation, as if he were seated on a barber's chair that raises and lowers him through the levels of sensation, which he travels through in both directions. Even Beckett's characters require attendants that measure the intimate allotropic variations of their bodies, and that look inside their heads ("Can you hear me?" "Can anyone see me?" "Can anyone hear me?" "Does anyone care about me at all?" ) . In both Bacon and Beckett, the attendant can be reduced to the circle of the circus ring, to a photographic apparatus or camera, to a photo-memory. But there must be an attendant-Figure for the variation- Figure. And doubtless the double variation, moving in two directions, can afiect a single Figure, but obviously it can also be divided between two Figures. And the attendant, for i ts part, can be two attendants, or several attendants (but in any case the interpretation of the attendant as a voyeur or spectator is insufficient, and merely figurative) . Thus the problem already exists quite apart from the triptychs, but it is in the triptychs, with their separate panels, that it is posed in the pure state. We would then have three rhythms: first, an "active" rhythm, with an increasing variation or amplification; then a "passive" rhythm, with a decreasing variation or elimination; and finally, the "attendant" rhythm. Rhythm would cease to be attached to and dependent on a Figure: it is rhythm itself that would become the Figure, that would constitute the Figure. 71 Francis Bacon This is exactly what Olivier Messiaen said about music when he distinguished between active rhythm, passive rhythm, and attendant rhythm, and demonstrated that they no longer referred to characters that have rhythm, but themselves constitute rhythmic characters. Imagine a scene in a play between three characters: the first acts in a brutal manner by hitting the second; the second character suffers this act, since his actions are dominated by those of the first; lastly, the third character is present at the conflict but remains inactive.9 We can thus formulate a hypothesis about the nature of the triptych, about its law or its order. That the triptych was traditionally a mobile painting or piece of furniture, that the wings of the triptych often included observers, priors, or tutelaries all of this suits Bacon, who thinks of his paintings as movable objects, and likes to paint constant attendants on them. But how does he restore such a topicality to the triptych, how does he implement this total re-creation of the triptych? He makes the triptych equivalent to the movements or parts of a piece of music more than a piece of furniture. The triptych would be the distribution of the three basic rhythms. There is a circular organization in the triptych, rather than a linear one. This hypothesis allows us to assign the triptychs a privileged place in Bacon's oeuvre. Paint the sensation, which is essentially rhythm . . . . But in the simple sensation, rhythm is still dependent on the Figure; it appears as the vibration that flows through the body without organs, it is the vector of the sensation, it is what makes the sensation pass from one level to another. In the coupling of sensation, rhythm is already liberated, 72 Couples and Triptychs because it confronts and unites the diverse levels of different sensations: it is now resonance, but it is still merged together with the melodic lines, the points and counterpoints, of a coupled Figure; it is the diagram of the coupled Figure. With the triptych, finally, rhythm takes on an extraordinary amplitude in a forced movement which gives it an autonomy, and produces in us the impression of time: the limits of sensation are broken, exceeded in all directions; the Figures are lifted up, or thrown in the air, placed upon aerial riggings from which they suddenly fall. But at the same time, in this immobile fall, the strangest phenomenon of recomposition or redistribution is produced, for it is the rhythm itself that becomes sensation, it is rhythm that becomes Figure, according to its own separated directions, the active, the passive, and the attendant. . . . Messiaen looked to Stravinsky and Beethoven as his precursors, and Bacon could look to Rembrandt for his own (and Soutine, with very different means) . For in Rembrandt's still lifes or genre paintings, but also in his portraits, there is first of all a disturbance or vibration: the contour is in the service of vibration. But there are also resonances that are derived from the layers of superimposed sensations. And even more, there is what Claudel described , this amplitude of light, an immense "stable and motionless background," that will have a bizarre effect, assuring the extreme division of Figures, their distribution into active, passive, and attendant Figures, as in Rembrandt's Night Watch [ 1 08] (or in those still-life paintings where the glasses at a constant level are "half-aerial attendants," while the two spirals of the peeled lemon and the mother- of-pearl are set against each other) . ] () 73 Chapter 10 Note: What Is a Triptych? The attendant The active and the passive The fall: the active reality of the difference in level Light, union and separation The hypothesis must be verified: Is there an order in the triptychs, and does this order consist in distributing the three fundamental rhythms, one of which would be the attendant or the measure of the two others? But since this order, if it exists, combines many variables, we must expect it to present very diverse aspects. We can respond to this question only through an empirical study of the triptychs. First of all, we can see that there are many explicit attendants in the triptychs: 1 962, the two disquieting characters in the left panel [29] ; 1 965, the two small old men seated at a table in the right panel, and the nude woman in the left panel [35]; 1 968, the two "attendants," one nude and the other clothed, on the left and right panels [53 ] ; 1 970, the observer on the left and the photographer on the right [61 ] ; 1 974, the photographer on the right [74] ; 1 976, the two simulacra of portraits on the right and left [79] ; and so on. But we can also see that things are much more complicated. For the attendant- function can refer to these characters figuratively, since 74 What Is a Triptych? there is always a figuration that persists, even if only secondarily. Yet this same attendant-function can sud- denly refer figuratively to a completely different char- acter. The attendant in this second sense will not be the same as the attendant in the first sense. Moreover, this more profound attendant (in the second sense) will not be one who observes or sees, but on the contrary, one who sees the superficial attendant (in the first sense) : there will thus have been a genuine exchange of the attendant- function in the triptych. The more profound attendant, the figural attendant, will be one who does not see, who is not in a position to see. It will be defined as an attendant because of a completely different feature, namely, its horizontality, its almost constant level. The horizontal defines a rhythm that is retrogradable in itself, thus without increase or decrease, without augmentation or diminution: it is the attendant-rhythm, whereas the two others, which are vertical, are retrogradable only in relation to each other, each being the retrogradation of the other. 1 In the triptychs, it is thus on the horizontal that we must seek the attendant-rhythm with a constant value. This horizontal can be presented in several Figures. First, there is the flat hysterical smile, which appears not only, as we have seen, in the 1953 triptych of the head ( left panel ) [ 1 3] , but already in the 1 944 triptych of monsters (central panel) [ 1 ] , where the head with bandaged eyes is not a head preparing to die, but an abominable head that smiles along the horizontal deformation of the mouth. The horizontal can also be executed in a movement of translation, as in the 1 973 triptych [ 73] : a horizontal translation in the center panel makes us move from the 7 5 Francis Bacon spasm on the right to the spasm on the left (here again we see that the order of succession, when there is one, does not necessarily go from left to right) . Again, the horizontal can be executed in a prone body, as in the central panel of 1 962 [29] , the central panel of 1 964 [33] , the left panel of 1 965 [35] , and the central panel of 1 966 [38] , where a flattening force is exerted on the sleepers. Or again, it can be executed in several prone or coupled bodies, following a horizontal diagram, as in the two pairs of sleepers in the right and left panels of Sweeney Agonistes [46] , or in the two sleepers in the central panels of the 1 970 triptychs [60, 6 1 ] . The triptychs thus utilize coupled Figures in their own way. Here then is the first element of complexity, one which, by i ts very complex- i ty, testifies to a law of the triptychs: an attendant- function is first imposed upon the visible characters, but it abandons them to affect more profoundly a rhythm that has itself become a character, a retrogradable rhythm or an attendant-witness following the horizontal. (Bacon occasionally puts the two attendants, the visible character and the rhythmic character, together on the same panel, as in the left panel of the 1 965 triptych [35] , or the right panel of Sweeney Agonistes [46] . ) At this point, a second element of complexity appears. To the extent that the attendant-function circulates throughout the painting, to the extent that the visible attendant gives way to the rhythmic attendant, two things take place. On the one hand, the rhythmic attendant does not appear as such immediately; it comes into existence only when the function is passed on to it ; until then it still has an active or passive rhythm. This is why the sleeping characters in the triptychs often have a 76 What Is a Triptych? disturbing trace of activity or passivity; although they are aligned on the horizontal, they still retain a heaviness or vivacity, a relaxation or contraction that comes from elsewhere. Thus, in Sweeney Agonistes [46] , the coupled Figure in the left panel is lying passively on its back, while the one on the right is still animated, almost whirling. Or again, even more frequently, the same coupled Figure will be composed of an active body and a passive body, with one part of the Figure pointing below the horizon ( the head, the buttocks . . . ) . But on the other hand, conversely, the visible attendant, which now ceases to be one, is free to assume other functions; it thus turns into an active rhythm or a passive rhythm, it links itself to one or the other at the very moment it ceases to be an attendant. F or example, the visible attendants of the 1 962 triptych [29] seem to raise themselves up like vampires, but one is passive and supporting his back so as not to fall, while the other is active and ready to fly away; or again, in a triptych of 1 970 [6 1 ] , we can compare the visible attendant on the left and the one on the right. There is thus a great mobility within the triptych, a great circulation. The rhythmic attendants are active or passive Figures that have just discovered their constant level, or are still seeking it, whereas the visible attendants are on the verge of springing up or falling down, becoming active or passive. A third element of complexity concerns these two other rhythms, active and passive. What do these two directions of vertical variation consist of? How are these two opposable rhythms distributed? There are simple cases in which it is a matter of a descending-rising opposition. In the 1 944 triptych of monsters [ 1 ] , a 7 7 Francis Bacon descending head whose hair is falling downward, and an inverted head whose screaming mouth is aimed upward, are placed on either side of the head with the horizontal smile; or again, in the 1 970 Studies of the Human Body [6 1 ] , the two recumbent Figures i n the middle panel are flanked, on the left, by a form that seems to rise up from i ts shadow and, on the right, by a form that seems to descend into i tself and into a puddle. But this is already a particular case of another opposition, a diastolic�systolic opposition. Here, it is the contraction which is opposed to a kind of extension, expansion, or descent-flow. The 1 965 Crucifixion [35] opposes the descent-flow of the crucified meat on the central panel, to the extreme contraction of the Nazi executioner; the 1 964 Three Figures in a Room [33] opposes the dilatation of the man on the toilet, on the left , to the contortion of the man on the stool, on the right. And perhaps it is the Three Studies rifthe Male Back of 1 970 [63] that displays most subtly, through lines and colors, the opposition between a large, relaxed, rose- colored back on the left, and a tense, redand blue- colored back on the right, while the blue in the center seems to remain at a constant level, even covering the dark mirror so as to emphasize i ts attendant-function. But sometimes the opposition is completely different and surprising: it is the opposition of the naked and the clothed which we find on the right and left panels of a 1 970 triptych [60] , but which we had also found on the right and left panels of the 1 968 triptych [53] in the two visible attendants. More subtly, in the 1 966 triptych of Lucian Freud [38] , the exposed shoulder with the contracted head, on the left, is opposed to the covered shoulder with the relaxed and sunken head, on the right. Finally, is there 78 What Is a Triptych? not another opposition that would even account for the naked and the clothed? This would be the augmentation- diminution opposition. There can be an extraordinary subtlety in what one chooses to add or take away: here we enter into a more profound domain of values and rhythm, since what is added or subtracted is not a quantity , a multiple or submultiple, but values defined by their precision or "brevity ." In particular, an added value can sometimes be produced by random spurts of paint, which Bacon likes to utilize. But perhaps the most striking and most moving example is in the triptych of August 1 972 [ 70] . If the attendant in the center i s furnished with elongations and a well-defined mauve oval, we find a diminished torso in the Figure on the left, since a whole portion of it is missing, while the torso on the right is in the process of being built up, half of it having already been added. But then everything changes with the legs. I n the left panel, one leg is already finished, while the other is in the process of being defined; in the right panel, i t is just the opposite: one leg is already amputated, while the other is flowing away. Correlatively, the mauve oval in the center changes status, turning into a pink pool lying next to the chair, in the left panel, and a red discharge from the leg, in the right panel. In this way, Bacon uses mutilations and prostheses in a game of added and subtracted values. I t is like a collection of hysterical "sleepings" and "awakenings" affecting the diverse parts of a body. But it is above all one of Bacon's most profoundly musical paintings. Ifwe reach such a great degree of complexity here, it is because these diverse oppositions are not equivalent, and their terms do not coincide. The result is a combinatorial 79 Francis Bacon freedom, and no list can ever be complete. The rising- descending, contraction-dilatation, and systolic-diastolic oppositions cannot be identified with each other. A discharge, for example, is indeed a descent, as well as a dilatation and expansion, but there is also a contraction in the discharge, as in the man at the washbasin [80] and the man on the toilet in the 1 973 triptych [73] . But must we still maintain an opposition between the local dilatation of the anus and the local contraction of the throat? Or is the opposition between two distinct contractions, with a passage from one to the other in the triptych? Everything can coexist, and the opposition can vary or even be reversed depending on the viewpoint one adopts, that is, depending on the value one considers. Sometimes, especially in the so-called closed series, the opposition is almost reduced to i ts direction in space. In the end, what matters in the two opposable rhythms is that each is the "retrogradation" of the other, while a common and constant value appears in the attendant- rhythm, retrogradable in i tself. This relativity of the triptych, however, is not sufficient. For if we have the impression that one of the opposable rhythms is "active" and the other "passive," what is it that justifies this impression, even if we assign these two terms extremely variable points of view that can change for a single painting, depending on the part one considers? What presides over the assignation in each case this time seems to be rather simple . In Bacon, primacy is given to the descent. Strangely, it is the active that descends, that plunges. The active is the fall, but it is not necessarily a descent in space, in extension. It is the descent as the passage of sensation, as the difference in 80 What Is a Trijl�ych? level contained in the sensation. Most artists, when confronted with this problem of intensity in the sensation, seem to have encountered the same response : the difference in intensity is experienced in a fall. Hence the idea of a fight for the fall: Over their heads their hands touched "accidentally." And as they touched they pulled them down abruptly and violently. For some time they both gazed attentively at their joined hands . Then they suddenly fell down it was impossible to tell who had been pushed by whom it looked as though it was their hands that had pushed them down.2 I t is like this in Bacon: the flesh descends from the bones, the body descends from the arms and the raised thighs. Sensation develops through the fall, by falling from one level to another. The idea of a positive and active reality of the fall is essential here . Why is the difference in level not experienced in the other direction, as a rise? Because the fall must not be interpreted in a thermodynamic manner, as ifit produced an entropy, a tendency to equalize at the lowest level. On the contrary, the fall exists to affirm the difference in level as such. All tension is experienced in a fall. Kant laid down the principle of intensity when he defined it as an instantaneously apprehended magnitude: he concluded that the plurality apprehended in this magnitude could only be represented by its approximation to negation = 0.3 Consequently, even when sensation tends toward a superior or higher level, it can make us experience it only by the approximation of this superior level to zero, that is, by a fall . Whatever the sensation may be, i ts intensive 8 1 Francis Bacon reality is a descent in depth that has a greater or lesser "magnitude," and not a rise. Sensation is inseparable from the fall that constitutes its most inward movement or "clinamen." This idea of the fall implies no context of misery, failure, or suffering, though it might be illustrated more easily in such a context. But just as the violence of a sensation must not be confused with the violence of a represented scene, the ever deeper fall of a sensation must not be confused with a fall represented in space, except for convenience and humor. The fall is what is most alive in the sensation, that through which the sensation is experienced as living. The intensive fall can thus coincide with a spatial descent, but also with a rise. I t can coincide with a diastole, a dilatation or a dissipation, but equally with a contraction or systole. It can coincide with a diminution, but equally with an augmentation. In short, everything that develops is a fall ( there are developments by diminutions) . The fall is precisely the active rhythm.4 Consequently, it becomes possible in each painting to determine ( through the sensation) what counts as the fall . I t is in this way that we determine the active rhythm, which varies from one painting to the other. And the opposable character, present in the painting, will assume the role of the passive rhythm. We can thus summarize these laws of the triptych, whose necessity is grounded in the coexistence of the three panels: ( 1 ) the distinction between the three rhythms or the three rhythmic Figures; ( 2 ) the existence of a attendant-rhythm, along with the circulation of this attendant throughout the painting (visible attendant and rhythmic attendant) ; (3 ) the determination of an active rhythm and a passive rhythm, with all the variations that 82 What Is a Triptych? depend on the character chosen to represent the active rhythm. These laws have nothing to do with a conscious formula that would simply need to be applied; they are a part of this irrational logic, or this logic of sensation, that consti tutes painting. They are neither simple nor voluntary . They must not be confused with the order of succession from left to right . They do not assign a univocal role to the center panel. The constants they imply change depending on the case at hand . They govern extremely variable terms, from the viewpoint of both their nature and their relations. There are so many movements in Bacon's paintings that the law of the triptychs can only be a movement of movements, or a state of complex forces, inasmuch as movement is always derived from the forces exerted upon the body. But the final question that remains is to know which forces correspond to the triptych. I f its laws are those that we have just laid out, what forces are they responding to? I n the first place, in the simple paintings, there was a double movement, from the structure to the Figure, and from the Figure to the structure: forces of isolation, deformation, and dissipation. But in the second place, there is a movement between the Figures themselves: forces of coupling that incorporate the phenomena of isolation, deformation, and dissipation in their own levels. Finally, there is a third type of movemen t and force, and it is here that the triptych intervenes: it can, in turn, incorporate coupling as a phenomenon, but it operates with other forces and implies other movements. On the one hand, it is no longer the Figure that returns to the structure or field; rather, it is the relations between Figures which are violently projected onto the field, and 83 Francis Bacon are now governed by the uniform color or the naked light; so that, in many cases [60, 62] , the Figures look like trapeze artists whose milieu is no longer anything but light and color. We at once realize that the triptychs have need of this luminous or colored vivacity, and are rarely susceptible to a global "malerisch" treatment; the 1 953 triptych of the head [ 1 3] would be one of the rare exceptions. But on the other hand, if the unity of light or color immediately incorporates the relationships between the Figures and the field, the result is that the Figures also attain their maximum separation in light and color: a force of separation or division sweeps over them, very different from the preceding force of isolation. This then is the principle of the triptychs: the maximum unity of light and color for the maximum division of Figures. Such was the lesson of Rembrandt : i t i s light that engenders rhythmic characters.5 This is why the body of the Figure passes through three levels of force, which culminate in the triptych. First, there is the fact of the Figure, when the body is submitted to forces of isolation, deformation, and dissipation. Then, a first "matter of fact," when two Figures are included in a single fact , that is, when the body submits to a force of coupling, a melodic force. Finally, the triptych: it is the separation of bodies in universal light and universal color that becomes the common fact of the Figures, their rhythmic being, the second "matter of fact" or the union that separates. A joining-together separates the Figures and separates the colors such is light. The Figure-beings separate while falling into the black light. The color-fields separate while falling into the white light. Everything becomes aerial in these triptychs of light; the separation 84 What Is a Trzj)£yclz? itself is in the air. Time is no longer in the chromatism of bodies; it has become a monochromatic eternity. An immense space-time unites all things, but only by introducing between them the distances �f a Sahara, the centuries of an aeon: the triptych and its separated panels. The triptych, in this sense, is indeed one way of going beyond "easel" painting; the three canvasses remain separated, but they are no longer isolated; and the frame or borders of a painting no longer refer to the limitative unity of each, but to the distributive unity of the three. And in the end, there are nothing but triptychs in Bacon: even the isolated paintings are, more or less visibly, composed like triptychs. 85 Chapter 11 The Painting before Painting . . . Cezanne and the fight against the cliche Bacon and photographs Bacon and probabilities Theory of chance: accidental marks The visual and the manual � The status of the figurative I t is a mistake to think that the painter works on a white surface. The figurative belief follows from this mistake. I f the painter were before a white surface, he or she could reproduce on it an external object functioning as a model. But such is not the case. The painter has many things in his head, or around him, or in his studio. Now everything he has in his head or around him is already in the canvas, more or less virtually, more or less actually, before he begins his work. They are all present in the canvas as so many images, actual or virtual, so that the painter does not have to cover a blank surface, but rather would have to empty it out, clear it, clean it. He does not paint in order to reproduce on the canvas an object functioning as a model; he paints on images that are already there, in order to produce a canvas whose functioning will reverse the relations between model and copy. In short, what we have to define are all these 86 The Painting bifore Painting . . . "givens" [donnees] that are on the canvas before the painter's work begins, and determine, among these givens, which are an obstacle, which are a help, or even the effects of a preparatory work. In the first place, there are figurative givens. Figuration exists, it is a fact, and it is even a prerequisite of painting. We are besieged by photographs that are illustrations, by newspapers that are narrations, by cinema-images, by television-images. There are psychic cliches just as there are physical cliches � ready-made perceptions, memories, phantasms. There is a very important experience here for the painter: a whole category of things that could be termed "cliches" already fills the canvas, before the beginning. It is dramatic . Cezanne seems to have effectively passed through this dramatic experience at its highest point. Cliches are always already on the canvas, and if the painter is content to transform the cliche, to deform or mutilate it, to manipulate it in every possible way, this reaction is still too intellectual, too abstract: it allows the cliche to rise again from its ashes, i t leaves the painter within the milieu of the cliche, or else gives him or her no other consolation than parody. D. H . Lawrence wrote some superb passages on this ever- renewed experience of Cezanne's: After a fight tooth-and-nail for forty years, he did succeed in knowing an apple, fully; and, not quite as fully, a jug or two. That was all he achieved. It seems little, and he died embittered. But it is the first step that counts, and Cezanne's apple is a great deal, more than Plato's Idea . . . . If Cezanne had been willing to accept his own baroque cliche, his drawing would have 87 Francis Bacon been perfectly conventionally "all right," and not a critic would have had a word to say about it . But when his drawing was conventionally all right, to Cezanne himself it was mockingly all wrong, it was cliche. So he flew at it and knocked all the shape and stuffing out of it, and when it was so mauled that it was all wrong, and he was exhausted with it, he let it go; bitterly, because it was still not what he wanted. And here comes in the comic element in Cezanne's pictures. His rage with the cliche made him distort the cliche sometimes into parody, as we see in pictures like The Pasha [99] and La Femme [ 1 00] . . . . He wanted to express something, and bifore he could do it he had to fight the hydra-headed cliche, whose last head he could never lop off. The fight with the cliche is the most obvious thing in his pictures. The dust of battle rises thick, and the splinters fly wildly. And it is this dust of battle and flying of splinters which his imitators still so fervently imitate . . . . I am convinced that what Cezanne himself wanted was representation. He wanted true-to-life representation. Only he wanted i t more true-to-life. And once you have got photography, it is a very, very difficult thing to get representation more true-to-life . . . . Try as he might, women remained a known, ready-made cliche object for him, and he could not break through the concept obsession to get at the intuitive awareness of her. Except with his wife and in his wife he did at least know the appleyness . . . . With men Cezanne often dodged it by insisting on the clothes, those stiff cloth jackets bent into thick folds, those hats, those blouses, those curtains. . . . Where Cezanne did sometimes escape the cliche altogether 88 The Painting before Painting . . . and really give a complete intuitive interpretation of actual objects is in some of the still-life composi- tions . . . . Here he is inimitable. His imitators imitate his accessories of tablecloths folded like tin, etc. the unreal parts of his pictures but they don' t imitate the pots and apples, because they can't . I t's the real appleyness, and you can't imitate it. Every man must create it new and different out of himself: new and different. The moment it looks "like" Cezanne, it is nothing. ! Cliches, cliches! The situation has hardly improved since Cezanne. Not only has there been a multiplication of images of every kind, around us and in our heads, but even the reactions against cliches are creating cliches. Even abstract painting has not been the last to produce its own cliches: "all these tubes and corrugated vibrations are stupid enough for anything and pretty sentimental ."2 Every imitator has always made the cliche rise up again, even from what had been freed from the cliche. The fight against cliches is a terrible thing. As Lawrence says, it is already something to have succeeded, to have gotten somewhere, with regard to an apple, or a jug or two. The Japanese know that a whole life barely sufiices for a single blade of grass. This is why great painters are so severe with their own work. Too many people mistake a photograph for a work of art, a plagiarism for an audacity, a parody for a laugh, or worse yet, a miserable stroke of inspiration for a creation. But great painters know that it is not enough to mutilate, maul, or parody the cliche in order to obtain a true laugh, a true deformation. Bacon is as severe with himself as was 89 Francis Bacon Cezanne, and like Cezanne, he lost many of his paintings, or renounced them, threw them away, as soon as the enemy reappeared. He passes judgment: the series of crucifixions? Too sensational, too sensational to be felt. Even the bullfights, too dramatic. The series of Popes? " I have tried very, very unsuccessfully to do certain records distorted records" of Velasquez's Pope, and " I regret them, because I think they're very silly . . . because 1 think that this thing was an absolute thing."3 What then, according to Bacon himself, should remain of Bacon's work? Some of the series of heads, perhaps, one or two aerial triptychs, and a large back of a man. Nothing more than an apple, or one or two jugs. We can see how Bacon's problem arises in relation to photography. He is truly fascinated by photographs (he surrounds himself with photographs; he paints his portraits from photographs of the model, while also making use of completely different photographs; he studies photographs of past paintings; and he has an extraordinary passion for photographs of himself . . . ) . At the same time, he ascribes no aesthetic value to the photograph (he says he prefers photographs that have no ambition in this regard, like those of Muybridge; above all, he likes X-rays and medical plates or, for the series of heads, pictures from photo-booths; and he senses a certain abjection in his own love of the photograph, his effusion for the photograph . . . ) . How are we to explain this attitude? It is due to the fact that the figurative givens are much more complex than they appear to be at first. No doubt they are ways of seeing, and as such, they are illustrative and narrative reproductions or representa- tions (photographs, newspapers) . But we can already see 90 The Painting b�for(' Painting . . . that they can work in two ways: by resemblance or by convention, through analogy or through a code. And no matter how they work, they themselves are something, they exist in themselves: they are not only ways of seeing, they are what is seen, until finally one sees nothing else.4 The photograph "creates" the person or the landscape in the sense that we say that the newspaper creates the event (and is not content to narrate it) . What we see, what we perceive, are photographs. The most significant thing about the photograph is that it forces upon us the "truth" of implausible and doctored images. Bacon has no intention of reacting against this movement; on the contrary, he abandons himself to it , and not without delight . Like Lucretius's simulacrum, photographs seem to him to cut across ages and temperaments, to come from afar, in order to fill every room or every brain. He therefore does not simply criticize photographs for being figurative or for representing something, since he is very sensitive to the fact that they are something, that they impose themselves upon sight and rule over the eye completely . They can thus lay claim to aesthetic pretensions, and compete with painting. Bacon does not believe they succeed at this, because he thinks the photograph tends to reduce sensation to a single level, and is unable to include within the sensation the difference between constitutive levels.5 But even if it could happen, as in Eisenstein's cinema-images or Muybridge's photo-images, it would only be by means of a transformation of the cliche or, as Lawrence said, by mauling the image. It would not create the kind of deformation that art produces (except in miracles like those of Eisenstein) . In short, even when the photograph 9 1 Francis Bacon ceases to be merely figurative, it remains figurative as a given, as a "perceived thing" the opposite of painting. This is why, despite all his abandon, Bacon has a radical hostility toward the photograph. Many modern or contemporary painters have integrated the photo- graph into the creative process of painting. They did this directly or indirectly, sometimes because they recognized a certain artistic power in photography, and sometimes, more simply, because they thought they could avoid the cliche by using the photograph to transform the picture.6 Now what is striking is that Bacon, for his part, sees nothing but imperfect solutions in all these methods: at no point does he ever integrate the photograph into the creative process. Occasionally he is content to paint something that functions as a photograph in relation to the Figure, and thus plays the role of an attendant; or else, twice, to paint a camera that sometimes resembles a prehistoric beast, sometimes a heavy rifle ( like Marey's rifle, which decomposed movement) [6 1 , 74] . Bacon's whole attitude, after all his reckless abandon, is one that rejects the photograph. This is because the photograph was much more fascinating, especially for him, when i t already filled the entire painting, before the painter set to work. Consequently, one cannot leave the photograph behind or escape from cliches simply by transforming the cliche. The greatest transformation of the cliche will not be an act of painting, i t will not produce the slightest pictorial deformation. I t would be much better to abandon oneself to cliches, to collect them, accumulate them, multiply them, as so many prepictorial givens: " the will to lose the will" comes first. 7 Only when one leaves them behind, through rejection, can the work begin. 92 The Painting b�j(ne Painting . . . Bacon docs not claim to dictate universal solutions. This is simply the particular path he follows with regard to the photograph. But what appear to be very different givens also seem to manifest themselves on the canvas, and inspire a practically analogous attitude in Bacon. For example, the interviews address the question of chance as often as the question of the photograph. And when Bacon speaks of chance, he docs so in much the same way that he speaks of the photograph: he has a very complex sentimental attitude (here again, with abandon) but from which he draws rules for rejection and very precise action. He often speaks of chance with his friends, but he seems to have had a hard time making himself understood. For he divides this domain into two parts, one of which is still rejected in the prepictorial stage, while the other belongs to the act of painting itself. If we consider a canvas before the painter begins working, all the places on it seem to be equivalent; they are all equally "probable. " And if they are not equivalent, it is because the canvas is a well- defined surface, with limits and a center. But even more so, it depends on what the painter wants to do, and what he has in his head: this or that place becomes privileged in relation to this or that project. The painter has a more or less precise idea of what he wants to do, and this prepictorial idea is enough to make the probabilities unequal. There is thus an entire order of equal and unequal probabilities on the canvas. And it is when the unequal probability becomes almost a certitude that I can begin to paint . But at that very moment, once I have begun, how do I proceed so that what I paint does not become a cliche? " Free marks" will have to be made rather quickly on the image being painted so as to destroy the nascent 9 3 Francis Bacon figuration in it and to give the Figure a chance, which is the improbable itself. These marks are accidental, "by chance" ; but clearly the same word, "chance," no longer designates probabilities, but now designates a type of choice or action without probability.s These marks can be called "nonrepresentative" precisely because they depend on the act of chance and express nothing regarding the visual image: they only concern the hand of the painter. In themselves, they serve no other purpose than to be u tilized and reutilized by the hand of the painter, who will use them to wrench the visual image away from the nascent cliche, to wrench himself away from the nascent illustration and narration. He will use the manual marks to make the visual image of the Figure emerge. From start to finish, accident and chance (in this second sense) will have been an act or a choice, a certain type of act or choice. Chance, according to Bacon, is inseparable from a possibility of u tilization. I t is manipulated chance, as opposed to conceived or seen probabilities. Puis Servien proposed a very interesting theory III which he claimed to dissociate two domains that were usually confused: probabilities, which are givens, the objects of a possible science, and which concern the dice before they are thrown; and chance, which designates, on the contrary, a type of choice, nonscientific and not yet aesthetic.9 Here is an original conception that seems to be spontaneously close to Bacon's, and which distinguishes him from other recent painters who have invoked chance or, more generally, art as play. For first of all, everything changes depending on whether the game invoked is of a combinatorial type (chess) or a " throw-by-throw" type (roulette without a martingale) . For Bacon, it is a matter 94 The Painting brJim Painting . . . of roulette, and he plays several tables at the same time � for example, three tables, exactly as if he were in front of the three panels of a triptych. l o But what this constitutes is precisely a set of probabilistic visual givens, to which Bacon can abandon himself all the more insofar as they are prepictorial; they express a prepictorial state of the painting, and will not be integrated into the act of painting. On the other hand, the chance choice made at each move is, rather, non pictorial or a-pictorial: it will become pictorial, it will be integrated into the act of painting, to the extent that it consists of manual marks that will reorient the visual whole, and will extract the improbable Figure Jrom the set oj figurative probabilities. We believe that this felt distinction between chance and probabilities is very important for Bacon. It explains the mass of misunderstandings that set Bacon against those who speak with him about chance, or who compare him with other painters. For example, he has been compared with Duchamp, who let three threads fall on the painted canvas, and fixed them exactly where they fell [ l O3] ; but for Bacon, this is nothing more than an set of probabilistic, prepictorial givens, which are not part of the act of painting. To take another example, Bacon is asked if anyone at all, such as his cleaning woman, would be capable of making random marks or not. And this time, the complex response is that, yes, the cleaning woman could do it in principle, abstractly; but she could not do it in fact, because she would not know how to utilize this chance or how to manipulate it . l l It is in the manipulation, in the reaction of the manual marks on the visual whole, that chance becomes pictorial or is integrated into the act of painting. Hence Bacon's 95 Francis Bacon obstinate insistence, despite the incomprehension of his interlocutors, that there is no chance except "manip- ulated" chance, no accident except a "utilized" accident . 1 2 In short, Bacon can have the same attitude toward both cliches and probabilities: a reckless, almost hyster- ical, abandon, since he turns this abandon into a ruse, a snare. Cliches and probabili ties are on the canvas, they fill it , they must fill it, before the painter's work begins. And the reckless abandon comes down to this: the painter himself must enter into the canvas before beginning. The canvas is already so full that the painter must enter into the canvas. I n this way, he enters into the cliche, and into probability. He enters into i t precisely because he knows what he wants to do, but what saves him is the fact that he does not know how to get there, he does not know how to do what he wants to do. 1 3 He will only get there by getting out of the canvas. The painter's problem is not how to enter into the canvas, since he is already there ( the prepictorial task) , but how to get out of it , thereby getting out of the cliche, getting out of probability ( the pictorial task) . I t is the chance manual marks that will give him a chance, though not a certitude, which would still imply a maximum probability. I n fact, the manual marks could easily add nothing, and definitively botch the painting. But if there is a chance, it is because they work by extracting the visual whole from its figurative state, in order to constitute a Figure that has finally become pictorial. One can fight against the cliche only with much guile, perseverance, and prudence: it is a task perpetually renewed with every painting, with every moment of every painting. I t is the way of the Figure. For it is easy to 96 The Painting before Painting . . . oppose the figural to the figurative in an abstract manner, but we never cease to trip over the objection of fact: the Figure is still figurative, it still represents someone (a screaming man, a smiling man, a sea ted man ) , it still narrates something, even if it is a surrealistic tale (head- umbrella-meat, howling meat . . . ) . We can now say that the opposition of the Figure to the figurative exists in a very complex inner relationship, and yet is not practically compromised or even attenuated by this relationship. There is a first, prepictorial figuration: it is on the canvas and in the painter's head, in what the painter wants to do, before the painter begins, in the form of cliches and probabilities. This first figuration cannot be completely eliminated; something of it is always conserved. 14 But there is a second figuration: the one that the painter obtains, this time as a result of the Figure, as an effect of the pictorial act. For the pure presence of the Figure is indeed the reconstitution of a representation, the re- creation of a figuration ( " this is a seated man, a Pope that screams or smiles . . . " ) . As Lawrence said, the first figuration ( the photograph) should be criticized, not for being too faithful or "true-to-life," but for not being faithful enough. And these two figurations the figuration conserved despite everything and the recov- ered figuration, the false fidelity and the true do not have the same nature. Between the two a leap in place is produced, a deformation in place, the emergence in place of the Figure: the pictorial act. Between what the painter wants to do and what he or she does there was necessarily a know-how, a "how to. " A probable visual whole (first figuration) has been disorganized and deformed by free manual traits which, by being reirljected into the whole, will produce the 97 Francis Bacon improbable visual Figure (second figuration) . The act of painting is the unity of these free manual traits and their effect upon and reinjection into the visual whole. By passing through these traits, figuration recovers and recreates, but does not resemble, the figuration from which it came. Hence Bacon's constant formula: create resemblance, but through accidental and nonresembling means . 1 5 So the act of painting is always shifting, it is constantly oscillating between a beforehand and an afterward: the hysteria of painting. . . . Everything is already on the canvas, and in the painter himself, before the act of painting begins. Hence the work of the painter is shifted back and only comes later, afterward: manual labor, out of which the Figure will emerge into view . . . . 98 Chapter 12 The Diagram The diagram in Bacon ( traits and color-patches) l I ts manual character -Painting and the experience of catastrophe -Abstract painting, code, and optical space Action painting, diagram, and manual space What Bacon dislikes about both these ways We do not listen closely enough to what painters have to say. They say that the painter is alrea4J in the canvas, where he or she encounters all the figurative and probabilistic givens that occupy and preoccupy the canvas. An entire battle takes place on the canvas between the painter and these givens. There is thus a preparatory work that belongs to painting fully, and yet precedes the act of painting. This preparatory work can be done in sketches, though it need not be, and in any case sketches do not replace it (like many contemporary painters, Bacon does not make sketches) . 2 This preparat- ory work is invisible and silent, yet extremely intense, and the act of painting itself appears as an afterward, an apres- coup ("hysteresis" ) in relation to this work. What does this act of painting consist of? Bacon defines it in this way: make random marks ( lines-traits) ; scrub, sweep, or wipe the canvas in order to clear out locales or zones (color-patches) ; throw the paint, from various 99 Francis Bacon angles and at various speeds. Now this act, or these acts, presuppose that there were already figurative givens on the canvas (and in the painter's head ) , more or less virtual, more or less actual. It is precisely these givens that will be removed by the act of painting, either by being wiped, brushed, or rubbed, or else covered over. For example, a mouth : it will be elongated, stretched from one side of the head to the other. For example, the head: part of it will be cleared away with a brush, broom, sponge, or rag. This is what Bacon calls a "graph" or a diagram: it is as if a Sahara, a zone of the Sahara, were suddenly inserted into the head; it is as if a piece of rhinoceros skin, viewed under a microscope, were stretched over it; it is as if the two halves of the head were split open by an ocean; it is as if the unit of measure were changed, and micrometric, or even cosmic, units were substituted for the figurative unit.3 A Sahara, a rhinoceros skin: such is the suddenly outstretched diagram. It is as if, in the midst of the figurative and probabilistic givens, a catastrophe overcame the canvas. I t is like the emergence of another world. For these marks, these traits, are irrational, involuntary, acci- dental, free, random. They are nonrepresentative, non- illustrative, nonnarrative. They are no longer either significant or signifiers: they are asignifying traits. They are traits of sensation, but of confused sensations ( the confused sensations, as Cezanne said, that we bring with us at birth) . And above all, they are manual traits. It is here that the painter works with a rag, stick, brush, or sponge; it is here that he throws the paint with his hands.4 It is as if the hand assumed an independence and began to be guided by other forces, making marks that no longer 1 00 The Diagram depend on either our will or our sight. These almost blind manual marks attest to the intrusion of another world into the visual world of figuration . To a certain extent, they remove the painting from the optical organization that was already reigning over it and rendering i t figurative in advance. The painter's hand intervenes in order to shake i ts own dependence and break up the sovereign optical organization: one can no longer see anything, as if in a catastrophe, a chaos. This is the act of painting, or the turning point of the painting. There are two ways in which the painting can fail: once visually and once manually. One can remain entangled in the figurative givens and the optical organization of representation; but one can also spoil the diagram, botch it, so overload it that it is rendered inoperative (which is another way of remaining in the figurative: one will have simply mutilated or mauled the cliche . . . ) .5 The diagram is thus the operative set of asignifying and nonrepresentative lines and zones, line- strokes and color-patches. And the operation of the diagram, its function, says Bacon, is to be "suggestive." Or, more rigorously, to use language similar to Wittgen- stein's, it is to introduce "possibilities of fact ."6 Because they are destined to give us the Figure, it is all the more important for the traits and color-patches to break with figuration. This is why they are not sufficient in themselves, but must be "utilized." They mark out possibilities of fact, but do not yet constitute a fact ( the pictorial fact) . In order to be converted into a fact, in order to evolve into a Figure, they must be reinjected into the visual whole; but it is precisely through the action of these marks that the visual whole will cease to be an 101 Francis Bacon optical organization; it will give the eye another power, as well as an object that will no longer be figurative. The diagram is the operative set of traits and color patches, of lines and zones. Van Gogh's diagram, for example, is the set of straight and curved hatch marks that raise and lower the ground, twist the trees, make the sky palpitate, and which assume a particular intensity from 1 888 onward . Not only can we differentiate diagrams, but we can also date the diagram of a painter, because there is always a moment when the painter confronts it most directly. The diagram is indeed a chaos, a catastrophe, but it is also a germ of order or rhythm. I t is a violent chaos i n relation to the figurative givens, but it is a germ of rhythm in relation to the new order of the painting. As Bacon says, it "unlocks areas of sensation."7 The diagram ends the preparatory work and begins the act of painting. There is no painter who has not had this experience of the chaos-germ, where he or she no longer sees anything and risks foundering: the collapse of visual coordinates. This is not a psychological experience, but a properly pictorial experience, although it can have an immense influence on the psychic life of the painter. Painters here confront the greatest of dangers both for their work and for themselves. I t is a kind of experience that is constantly renewed by the most diverse painters: Cezanne's "abyss" or "catastrophe," and the chance that this abyss will give way to rhythm; Paul Klee's "chaos," the vanishing "gray point," and the chance that this gray point will "leap over itself' and unlock dimensions of sensation . . . . 8 Of all the arts, painting is undoubtedly the only one that necessarily, "hysterically," integrates its own catastrophe, and consequently is constituted as a 1 02 The Diagram flight in advance. In the other arts, the catastrophe is only associated. But painters pass through the cata- strophe themselves, embrace the chaos, and attempt to emerge from it . Where painters differ is in their manner of embracing this nonfigurative chaos, and in their evalua- tion of the pictorial order to come, and the relation of this order with this chaos. In this respect, we might perhaps distinguish three great paths, each of which groups together very different painters, but each of which designates a "modern" function of painting, or expresses what painting claims to bring to "modern man" (Why still paint today? ) . Abstraction would be one of these paths, but it is a path that reduces the abyss or chaos (as well as the manual) to a minimum: it offers us an asceticism, a spiritual salvation. Through an intense spiritual effort, it raises itself above the figurative givens, but it also turns chaos into a simple stream we must cross in order to discover the abstract and signifying Forms. Mondrian's square leaves the figurative ( landscape) and leaps over chaos. I t retains a kind of oscillation from this leap. Such an abstraction is essentially seen. One is tempted to say of abstract painting what Peguy said of Kantian morality: it has pure hands, but it has no hands. This is because the abstract forms are part of a new and purely optical space that no longer even needs to be subordinate to manual or tactile elements. In fact, they are distinguished from simple geometrical forms by "tension": tension is what internalizes in the visual the manual movement that describes the form and the invisible forces that determine it. I t is what makes the form a properly visual transformation. Abstract optical space has no need of the tactile connections that classical 1 03 Francis Bacon representation was still organizing. But it follows that what abstract painting elaborates is less a diagram than a symbolic code, on the basis of great formal oppositions. I t replaced the diagram with a code. This code is "digital," not in the sense of the manual, but in the sense of a finger that counts. "Digits" are the units that group together visually the terms in opposition. Thus, according to Kandinsky, vertical-white-activity, horizontal-black- inertia, and so on. From this is derived a conception of binary choice that is opposed to random choice. Abstract painting took the elaboration of such a properly pictorial code very far (as in Auguste Herbin's "plastic alphabet," in which the distribution of forms and colors can be done according to the letters of a word) .9 I t is the code that is responsible for answering the question of painting today: What can save man from "the abyss," from external tumult and manual chaos? Open up a spiritual state for the man of the future, a man without hands. Restore to man a pure and internal optical space, which will perhaps be made up exclusively of the horizontal and the vertical. "Modern man seeks rest because he is deafened by the externaL . . . " 1 0 The hand is reduced to a finger that presses on an internal optical keyboard. A second path, often named abstract expressionism or art inJormel, offers an entirely different response, at the opposite extreme of abstraction. This time the abyss or chaos is deployed to the maximum. Somewhat like a map that is as large as the country, the diagram merges with the totality of the painting; the entire painting is diagram- matic. Optical geometry disappears in favor of a manual line, exclusively manual. The eye has difficulty following it. The incomparable discovery of this kind of painting is 1 04 The Diagram that of a line (and a patch of color) that does not form a contour, that delimits nothing, neither inside nor outside, neither concave nor convex: Pollack's line, Morris Louis's stain . It is the northern stain, the "Gothic line" : the line does not go from one point to another, but passes between points, continually changing direction, and attains a power greater than 1 , becoming adeq ua te to the en tire surface. From this point of view, we can see how abstract painting remained figurative, since its line still delimited an outline. If we seek the precursors of this new path, of this radical manner of escaping the figurative, we will find them every time a great painter of the past stopped painting things in order " to paint between things ." l l Turner's late watercolors conquer not only all the forces of impressionism, but also the power of an explosive line without outline or contour, which makes the painting i tself an unparalleled catastrophe ( rather than illustrating the catastrophe romantically) . Moreover, is this not one of the most prodigious constants of painting that is here being selected and isolated? In Kandinsky, there were nomadic lines without contour next to abstract geometric lines; and in Mondrian, the uneq ual thickness of the two sides of the square opened up a virtual diagonal without contours. But with Pollack, this line-trait and this color-patch will be pushed to their functional limit: no longer the transforma- tion of the form but a decomposition of matter, which abandons us to its lineaments and granulations. The painting thus becomes a catastrophe-painting and a diagram-painting at one and the same time. This time, i t is at the point closest to catastrophe, in absolute proximity, that modern man discovers rhythm: we can easily see how this response to the question of a "modern" function of 1 05 Francis Bacon painting is different from that given by abstraction. Here it is no longer an inner vision that gives us the infinite, but a manual power that is spread out "all over," 1 2 from one edge of the painting to the other. In the unity of the catastrophe and the diagram, man discovers rhythm as matter and material. The painter's instruments are no longer the paintbrush and the easel, which still conveyed the subordination of the hand to the requirements of an optical organization. The hand is liberated, and makes use of sticks, sponges, rags, syringes: action painting, the "frenetic dance" of the painter around the painting, or rather in the painting, which is no longer stretched on an easel but nailed, unstretched, to the ground. There has been a conversion from the horizon to the ground: the optical horizon reverts completely to the tactile ground. The diagram expresses the entire painting at once; that is, the optical catastrophe and the manual rhythm. The current evolution of abstract expressionism is completing this process by realizing what was still little more than a metaphor in Pollock: ( l ) the extension of the diagram to the spatial and temporal whole of the painting (displace- ment of the "beforehand" and the "afterward" ) ; (2 ) the abandonment of any visual sovereignty, and even any visual control, over the painting in the process of being executed ( the blindness of the painter) ; (3 ) the elabora- tion of lines that are "more" than lines, surfaces that are "more" than surfaces, or, conversely, volumes that are "less" than volumes (Carl Andre's planar sculptures, Robert Ryman's fibers, Martin Barre's laminated works, Christian Bonnefoi's strata) . 1 3 I t i s all the more curious that the American critics, who 1 06 The Diagram took the analysis of abstract expressionism very far, could have defined it as the creation of a purely optical space, exclusively optical, peculiar to "modern man." This seems to us to be a quarrel over words, an ambiguity of words. In effect, what they meant was that the pictorial space lost all the imaginary tactile referents which, in classical three- dimensional representation, made it possible to see depths and contours, forms and grounds. But these tactile referents of classical representation expressed a relative subordination of the hand to the eye, of the manual to the visual. By liberating a space that is (wrongly) claimed to be purely optical, the abstract expressionists in fact did nothing other than to make visible an exclusively manual space, defined by the "planarity" of the canvas, the "impenetrability" of the painting, and the "gesturality" of the color a space that is imposed upon the eye as an absolutely foreign power in which the eye can find no rest . 1 4 These are no longer the tactile referents of vision, but, precisely because it is the manual space of what is seen, a violence done to the eye . In the end, it was abstract painting that produced a purely optical space, and suppressed tactile referents in favor of an eye of the mind: it suppressed the task of controlling the hand that the eye still had in classical representation. But action painting does something completely different: it reverses the classical subordination, it subordinates the eye to the hand, it imposes the hand on the eye, and it replaces the horizon with a ground. One of the most profound tendencies of modern painting is the tendency to abandon the easel. For the easel was a decisive element not only in the maintenance of a figurative appearance, and not only in the relationship 1 07 Francis Bacon between the painter and Nature ( the search for a motif) , but also in the delimitation (frame and borders) and internal organization of the painting (depth, perspective . . . ) . What matters today is less the fact does the painter still have an easel? than the tendency, and the diverse ways this tendency is realized . In an abstraction of Mondrian's type, the painting ceases to be an organism or an isolated organization in order to become a division of its own surface, which must create its own relations with the divisions of the "room" in which it will be hung. In this sense, Mondrian's painting is not decorative but architec- tonic, and abandons the easel in order to become mural painting. Pollock and others explicitly reject the easel in a completely different manner, namely, by making "all over" paintings, by rediscovering the secret of the "Gothic line" (in Worringer's sense ) , by restoring an entire world of equal probabilities, by tracing lines that cross the entire painting and that start and continue off the frame, and by opposing to the organic notions of symmetry and center the power of a mechanical repetition elevated to intuition. This is no longer an easel painting, but a ground painting ( true easels have no other horizon than the ground) . 15 But in truth there are many ways of breaking with the easel. Bacon's triptych form is one of these ways, very different from the two preceding ways. In Bacon, what is true of the triptychs is also true of each independent painting, which is always, in one way or another, composed like a triptych. I n the triptych, as we have seen, the borders of each of the three panels cease to isolate, though they continue to separate and divide. This uniting-separating is Bacon's technical solution, which brings his entire set of techniques into play, and distinguishes them from the techniques of l O8 The Diagram abstract and informal painting. Are these three ways of once again becoming "gothic"? The important question is: Why did Bacon not become involved in either of the two preceding paths? The severity of his reactions, rather than claiming to pass judgment, simply indicate what was not right for him, and explain why Bacon personally took neither of these paths. On the one hand, he is not attracted to paintings that tend to substitute a visual and spiritual code for the involuntary diagram (even if there is an exemplary attitude on the part of the artist) . The code is inevitably cerebral and lacks sensation, the essential reality of the fall, that is, the direct action upon the nervous system. Kandinsky defined abstract painting by "tension," but according to Bacon, tension is what abstract painting lacks the most. By internalizing tension in the optical form, abstract painting neutralized it. Finally, because it is abstract, the code can easily become a simple symbolic coding of the figurative. 16 On the other hand, Bacon is not drawn to abstract expressionism, or to the power and mystery of the line without contour. This is because the diagram covers the entire painting, he says, and because its proliferation creates a veritable "mess ." All the violent methods of action painting stick, brush, broom, rag, and even pastry bag are let loose in a catastrophe- painting. This time sensation is indeed attained, but it remains in an irremediably confused state. Bacon will never stop speaking of the absolute necessity of prevent- ing the diagram from proliferating, the necessity of confining it to certain areas of the painting and certain moments of the act of painting. He thinks that in this domain of the irrational trait and the line without 1 09 Francis Bacon contour, Michaux went further than Pollock, precisely because he remained a master of the diagram. 1 7 Save the contour nothing is more important for Bacon than this . A line that delimits nothing still has a contour or outline itself. Blake at least understood this . I S The diagram must not eat away at the entire painting, i t must remain limited in space and time. I t must remain operative and controlled . The violent methods must not be given free reign, and the necessary catastrophe must not submerge the whole. The diagram is a possibility of fact it is not the fact itself. Not all the figurative givens have to disappear; and above all, a new figuration, that of the Figure, should emerge from the diagram and make the sensation clear and precise. To emerge from the catastrophe . . . . Even if, as an afterthought, one finishes a painting with a spurt of paint, it functions like a local "whiplash" that makes us emerge from the catastrophe rather than submerging us further. 19 Could we at least say that during the "malerisch" period the diagram covered the whole painting? Had not the entire surface of the painting been lined with traits of grass, or variations of a dark color-patch functioning as a curtain? But even then, the precision of the sensation, the clarity of the Figure, and the rigor of the contour continued to act beneath the color-patch or the traits which did not efface the former, but instead gave them a power of vibration and nonlocalization ( the mouth that smiles or screams) . And in his subsequent period, Bacon returns to a localization of random traits and scrubbed zones . Bacon thus follows a third path, which is neither optical like abstract painting, nor manual like action painting. 1 1 0 Chapter 13 Analogy Cezanne: the motif as diagram The analogical and the digital Painting and analogy The paradoxical status of abstract painting The analogical language of Cezanne, and of Bacon: plane, color, and mass Modulation Resemblance recovered There would thus be a tempered use of the diagram, a kind of middle way in which the diagram is not reduced to the state of a code, and yet does not cover the entire painting, avoiding both the code and its scrambling . . . . Must we then speak of wisdom or classicism? I t is hard to believe, however, that Cezanne followed a middle way. Rather, he invented a specific way, distinct from the two preceding ones. Few painters have produced the experi- ence of chaos and catastrophe as intensely, while fighting to limit and control it at any price. Chaos and catastrophe imply the collapse of all the figurative givens, and thus they already entail a fight, the fight against the cliche, the preparatory work (all the more necessary in that we are no longer "innocent" ) . It is out of chaos that the "stubborn geometry" or "geologic lines" first emerge; and this geometry or geology must in turn pass through the catastrophe in order for colors to arise, for the earth to rise toward the sun . l I t is thus a temporal diagram, with I I I Francis Bacon two moments. But the diagram connects these two moments indissolubly: the geometry is its "frame" and color is the sensation, the "coloring sensation." The diagram is exactly what Cezanne called the motif. In effect, the motif is made up of two things: the sensation and the frame. It is their intertwining. A sensation, or a point of view, is not enough to make a motif: the sensation, even a coloring sensation, is ephemeral and confused, lacking duration and clarity (hence the critique of impressionism) . But the frame suffices even less: it is abstract. The geometry must be made concrete or felt, and at the same time the sensation must be given duration and clarity.2 Only then will something emerge from the motif or diagram. Or rather, this operation that relates geometry to the sensible, and sensation to duration and clarity, is already just that: it is the outcome, the result. Two questions follow from this: What makes this relation within the motif or diagram possible ( possibility of fact) ? And how is this relation constituted when it emerges from the diagram ( the fact itself) ? The first question concerns use. For if geometry is not a part of painting, there are nonetheless properly pictorial uses of geometry. We called one of these uses "digital," not in direct reference to the hand, but in reference to the basic units of a code. Once again, these basic units or elementary visual forms are indeed aesthetic and not mathematic, inasmuch as they have completely intern- alized the manual movement that produces them. They still form a code of painting, however, and turn painting into a code. It is in this sense, close to abstract painting, that we must understand Serusier's saying: "Synthesis consists in reducing all forms to the smallest number of 1 1 2 Analogy forms of which we are capable of thinking straight lines, some angles, arcs of the circle and the ellipse." Synthesis is thus an analytic of elements. When Cezanne, on the contrary, urges the painter to "treat nature through the cylinder, the sphere, the cone, putting the whole in perspective, " one has the impression that abstract painters would be wrong to see this as a blessing not only because Cezanne puts the emphasis on volumes, except the cube, but above all because he suggests a completely different use of geometry than that of a code of painting.3 The cylinder is this stovepipe (emerging from the tinsmith's hands) or this man (whose arms do not matter . . . ) . Following current terminology, we could say that Cezanne creates an analogical use of geometry, and not a digital use . The diagram or motif would be analogical, whereas the code is digital. "Analogical language," it is said, belongs to the right hemisphere of the brain or, better, to the nervous system, whereas "digital language" belongs to the left hemi- sphere. Analogical language would be a language of relations, which consists of expressive movements, para- linguistic signs, breaths and screams, and so on. One can question whether or not this is a language properly speaking. But there is no doubt, for example, that Artaud's theater elevated scream-breaths to the state of language. More generally, painting elevates colors and lines to the state of language, and it is an analogical language. One might even wonder if painting has not always been the analogical language par excellence. \;Vhen we speak of analogical language in animals, we do not consider their possible songs, which belong to a different domain; rather we are essentially concerned 113 Francis Bacon with cries, variable colors, and lines (attitudes, postures) . Now our first temptation, which would be to define the digital by convention, and the analogical by similitude or resemblance, is obviously ill founded. A scream no more resembles what it signals than a word resembles what it designates. One could then define the analogical by a certain obviousness or "evidence," by a certain presence that makes itself felt immediately, whereas the digital needs to be learned . But this is no better, for the analogical requires an apprenticeship as well, even in animals, although it is a different type of apprenticeship than the acquisition of the digital. The very existence of painting would be enough to confirm the necessity of a lengthy apprenticeship for the analogical to become language. The question therefore cannot be decided by appealing to a clear-cut theory, but must be made the object of practical studies (on which the status of painting depends) . Thus we cannot be content with saying that analogical language proceeds by resemblance, whereas the digital operates through code, convention, and combinations of conventional units. For one can do at least three things with a code. One can make an intrinsic combination of abstract elements. One can also make a combination which will yield a "message" or a "narrative", that is, which will have an isomorphic relation to a referential set. Finally, one can code the extrinsic elements in such a way that they would be reproduced in an autonomous manner by the intrinsic elements of the code ( in portraits produced by a computer, for instance, and in every instance where one could speak of "making a shorthand of figuration" ) . 4 It seems, then, that a digital code covers 1 1 4 Analogy certain forms of similitude or analogy: analogy by isomorphism, or analogy by produced resemblance. But conversely, even when analogy is independent of every code, one can still distinguish two forms of it, depending on whether the resemblance is the producer or the product. Resemblance is the producer when the relations between the clements of one thing pass directly into the elements of another thing, which then becomes the image of the first for example, the photograph, which captures relations of light. The fact that these relations play within a margin of error great enough for the image to present significant differences from the original object does not negate the fact that these differences are attained by a loose resemblance, some- times decomposed in its operation, sometimes trans- formed in its result. In this case, analogy is figurative, and resemblance remains primary in principle. The photo- graph can rarely escape this limit, despite all its ambitions. On the contrary, one says that resemblance is the product when it appears abruptly as the result of relations that are completely different from those it is supposed to reproduce: resemblance then emerges as the brutal product of non resembling means. We have already seen an instance of this in one of the analogies of the code, in which the code reconstituted a resemblance as a function of its own internal elements. But in that case, it was only because the rclations to be reproduced had themselves already been coded, whereas now, in the absence of any code, the relations to be reproduced are instead produced directly by completely different rela- tions, creating a resemblance through nonresembling means. In this last type of analogy, a sensible resemblance 1 1 5 Francis Bacon is produced, but instead of being produced symbolically, through the detour of the code, it is produced "sen- sually," through sensation. The name "aesthetic Ana- logy" must be reserved for this last eminent type, in which there is neither primary resemblance nor prior code, and which is both nonfigurative and noncodified. In his great semiological theory, Peirce first defined icons by similitude, and symbols by a conventional rule. But he acknowledged that conventional symbols are composed of icons (by virtue of phenomena of isomorph- ism ) , and that pure icons range far beyond qualitative similitude, and consist of "diagrams."5 But it is still difficult to explain what an analogical diagram is, as opposed to a digital or symbolic code. Today we can relate it to the sonorous example of synthesizers . Analogical synthesizers are "modular" : they establish an immediate connection between heterogeneous elements, they introduce a literally unlimited possibility of connec- tion between these elements, on a field of presence or finite plane whose moments are all actual and sensible. Digital synthesizers, however, are " integral" : their operation passes through a codification, through a homogenization and binarization of the data, which is produced on a separate plane, infinite in principle, and whose sound will only be produced as the result of a conversion-translation. A second difference appears at the level of filters. The primary function of the filter is to modify the basic color of a sound, to constitute or vary its timbre. But digital filters proceed by an additive synthesis of elementary codified formants, whereas the analogical filter usually acts through the subtraction of frequencies ( "high-pass," "low-pass" . . . ) . What is added from one 1 1 6 Analogy filter to the next are intensive subtractions, and i t is thus an addition of subtractions that constitutes modulation and sensible movement as a fall.6 In short, it is perhaps the notion of modulation in general (and not similitude) that will enable us to unders tand the nature of analogical language or the diagram. Painting is the analogical art par excellence. It is even the form through which analogy becomes a language, or finds its own language: by passing through a diagram. Abstract painting consequently poses a very particular problem. Abstract painting obviously proceeds by code and program, implying operations of homogenization and binarization that are constitutive of a digital code. But the abstractionists often happen to be great painters, which means that they do not simply apply to painting a code that would be external to it; on the contrary, they elaborate an intrinsically pictorial code. I t is thus a paradoxical code, since instead of being opposed to analogy, it takes analogy as its object; it is the digital expression of the analogical as such. 7 Analogy will pass through a code rather than passing through a diagram. I t has a status that borders o n the impossible. And in another way, perhaps art informel also borders on the impossible, for by extending the diagram to the entire painting, it takes the diagram for the analogical flux itself, rather than making the flux pass through the diagram. This time, it is as if the diagram were directed toward i tself, rather than being used or treated. It no longer goes beyond itself in a code, but grounds itself in a scrambling. The "middle" way, on the contrary, is one that makes use of the diagram in order to constitute an analogical language. It assumes its complete independence with 1 1 7 Francis Bacon cezanne. I t is called a "middle" way only from a very external point of view, since it implies just as much radical invention and destruction of figurative coordin- ates as the other ways. As an analogical language, painting has three dimensions: the planes, the connection or junction of planes (primarily of the vertical plane and the horizontal plane ) , which replaces perspective; color, the modulation of color, which tends to suppress relations of value, chiaroscuro, and the contrast of shadow and light; and the body, the mass and declination of the body, which exceeds the organism and destroys the form- background relationship. There is a triple liberation here of the body, of the planes, and of color (for what enslaves color is not only the contour, but also the contrast of values ) . Now this liberation can occur only by passing through the catastrophe; that is, through the diagram and its involuntary irruption: bodies are thrown off balance, they are in a sta te of perpetual fall; the planes collide with each other; colors become confused and no longer delimit an object. In order for the rupture with figurative resemblance to avoid perpetuating the cata- strophe, in order for it to succeed in producing a more profimnd resemblance, the planes, starting with the diagram, must maintain their junction; the body's mass must integrate the imbalance in a deformation (neither transformation nor decomposition, but the "place" of a force) ; and above all, modulation must find i ts true meaning and technical formula as the law of Analogy. I t must act a s a variable and continuous mold, which i s not simply opposed to relief in chiaroscuro, but invents a new type of relief through color. And perhaps this modulation oj color is Cezanne's principal operation. By substituting 1 1 8 Analogy for relations of value a juxtaposition of tints brought together in the order of the spectrum, modulation will define a double movement of expansion and contraction an expansion in which the planes, and especially the horizontal and the vertical planes, are connected and even merged in depth ; and at the same time, a contraction through which everything is restored to the body, to the mass, as a function ofa point of imbalance or a fall .s It is through such a system that geometry becomes sensible, and sensations become clear and durable: one has "realized" the sensation, says Cezanne. Or, following Bacon's formula, one has passed from the possibility of fact to the Fact, from the diagram to the painting. In what sense is Bacon Cezannean, and in what sense does he have nothing to do with Cezanne? The enormity of their differences is obvious. The depth where the planes are joined is no longer the strong depth of Cezanne but a "shallow" or "superficial" depth, inherited from the post- cubism of Picasso and Braque (and which one finds elsewhere in abstract cxpressionism) ,'l It is this type of depth that Bacon achieves, sometimes by joining the vertical and horizontal planes, as in his works of radical precision, and sometimes by merging them, as in the rnalerisch period where, for example, the verticals of the curtain cut through the horizontals of the blinds. In the same way, the treatment of color not only passes through the modulated flat patches of color (smooth planes [rneplats] ) that envelop the bodies, but also through the large surfaces or fields which imply axes, structures, or armatures that are perpendicular to the bodies: it is the whole modulation that changes nature. lO Finally, the deformation of bodies is very different, as we have seen, 1 1 9 Francis Bacon insofar as the forces that are exerted upon bodies, in the open world of Cezanne (Nature) and in the closed world of Bacon, are not the same. But where Bacon does remain Cezannean is in the extreme elaboration of painting as analogical language. To be sure, even the distribution of rhythms in the triptychs has nothing to do with a code. The conic scream that combines with the verticals, and the extended triangular smile that merges with the horizontals, are the true "motifs" of this painting. But it is this kind of painting in its entirety which is a scream and a smile; that is to say, analogical. Analogy finds its highest law in the treatment of colors. This treatment is opposed to relations of value, of light and shadow, of chiaroscuro. One consequence of this is that even black and white are liberated, they are turned into colors, so that black shadows acquire a real presence and white light acquires an intense clarity, which is diffused throughout all the ranges of color. But "colorism" is not opposed to relief, nor even to a drawn contour. The contour can even have a separate existence, becoming the common limit of the armature and the body-mass, because the latter are no longer in a relationship of form to ground, but in a relation of coexistence or proximity modulated by color. And through the membrane of the contour, a double movement is produced: a flat extension toward the armature and a voluminous contraction toward the body. This is why Bacon's three elements were the structure or armature, the Figure, and the contour, which find their effective convergence in color. The diagram, the agent of analogical language, does not act as a code, but as a modulator. The diagram and its involuntary 1 2 0 Analogy manual order will have been used to break all the figurative coordinates; but it is through this very action (when it is operative) that it defines possibilities of fact, by liberating lines for the armature and colors for modulation. Lines and colors are then able to constitute the Figure or the Fact, that is, to produce the new resemblance inside the visual whole, where the diagram must operate and be realized. 1 2 1 Chapter 14 �ve� �ainter �ecajJitulates the Histo� of �ainting in His or Her Own Way . . . Egypt and haptic presentation Essence and accident - - Organic representation and the tactile-optical world Byzantine art: a pure optical world? Gothic art and the manual Light and color, the optic and the haptic Glory to the Egyptians. "I could never dissociate myself from the great European images of the past and by 'European' I mean to include Egyptian, even if the geographers wouldn't agree with me. " l Can the Egyptian assemblage be taken as the point of departure for Western painting? It is an assemblage of bas-relief even more than of painting. Alois Riegl defined it as follows: ( I ) Bas-relief brings about the most rigid link between the eye and the hand because its element is the flat surface, which allows the eye to function like the sense of touch; furthermore, it confers, and indeed imposes, upon the eye a tactile, or rather haptic, function; it thereby ensures, in the Egyptian "will to art," the joining together of the two senses of touch and sight, like the soil and the horizon. (2 ) It is a frontal and close view that assumes this haptic function, 1 22 El'er)! Painter Recapitulates the History of Painting since the form and the ground lie on the same plane of the surface, equally close to each other and to ourselves. ( 3 ) What separates and unites both the form and the ground is the contour as their common limi t. (4) It is the rectilinear contour, or regular curve, that isolates the form as an essence, a closed unity that is shielded from all accident, change, deformation, and corruption; essence acquires a formal and linear presence that dominates the flux of existence and representation. (5 ) I t is thus a geometry of the plane, of the line, and of essence that inspires Egyptian bas-relief; but it will also incorporate volume by covering the funerary cube with a pyramid; that is, by erecting a Figure that only reveals to us the unitary surface of isosceles triangles on clearly limited sides. (6) I t is not only man and the world that i n this way receive their planar or linear essence; it is also the animal and the vegetal, the sphinx and the lotus, which are raised to their perfect geometrical form, whose very mystery is the mystery of essence.2 Through the centuries, there are many things that make Bacon an Egyptian: the fields, the contour, the form and the ground as two equally close sectors lying on the same plane, the extreme proximity of the Figure (presence) , the system of clarity [netteteJ Bacon renders to Egypt the homage of the sphinx [ 1 8] , and declares his love for Egyptian sculpture: like Rodin, he thinks that durability, essence, or eternity are the primary char- acteristics of the work of art (which even the photograph lacks) . And when he considers his own painting, he says something curious, namely, that sculpture had tempted him a great deal, but also that he realized that what he expected from sculpture was exactly what he had 1 23 Francis Bacon succeeded in doing in painting. l What kind of sculpture was he thinking of? A sculpture that would have included the three pictorial elements: the armature-ground, the Figure-form, and the contour-limit. He specifies that the Figure, along with its contour, should be able to slide along the armature. But even taking this mobility into account, we can see that Bacon is thinking of a bas-relief type of sculpture, something in between sculpture and painting. Yet as close as Bacon may be to Egypt, how can we explain the fact that his sphinx is scrambled, treated in a "malerisch" manner? What is at stake here is no longer just Bacon, but undoubtedly the entire history of Western painting. If we attempted to define this Western painting, we could take Christianity as our first point of reference. For Chris- tianity subjected the form, or rather the Figure, to a fundamental deformation. Insofar as God was incarn- ated, crucified, descended, ascended to heaven, and so on, the form or the Figure was no longer rigorously linked to essence, but to what, in principle, is its opposite: the event, or even the changeable, the accident. Christianity contains a germ of tranquil atheism that will nurture painting; the painter can easily be indifferent to the religious subject he is asked to represent. Nothing prevents the painter from realizing that, because of its now essential relation with the accident, the form can become not a God on the <::ross, but more simply a "napkin or a rug on the point of unrolling, the handle of a knife ready to become detached, a little loaf of bread falling into slices as if of its own volition, an overturned cup, all sorts of vases or fruits tumbled into a heap, and overhanging plates ."4 All of this can be put on Christ 1 24 EVelY Painter Recapitulates thr HistolJ oj Painting himself, or close by him: Christ is besieged, and even replaced, by accidents. Modern painting begins when man no longer experiences himself as an essence, but as an accident. There is always a fall , a risk of the fall; the form begins to express the accident, and no longer the essence. Claudel is correct to see one summit of this movement in Rembrandt and Dutch painting, but it thereby belongs eminently to Western painting. It is because Egypt put the form in the service of essence that Western painting could make this conversion ( the problem was posed very differently in the Orient, which did not "begin" with essence) . We only took Christianity as a first point of reference which it would be necessary to look beyond. For Greek art had already freed the cube from its pyramidal covering: it distinguished the planes, invented a perspective, and put into play light and shadow, hollows and reliefs . If we can speak of a classical representation, it i s because i t implies the conquest of an optical space, a distant viewing that is never frontal: the form and the ground are no longer on the same plane, the planes are distinguished from each other, and a perspective traverses them in depth, uniting the background-plane to the foreground- plane; objects overlap each other, light and shadow fill up space and make it rhythmic, the contour ceases to be the common limit on a single plane and becomes the self- limitation of the form or the primacy rif the Joreground. Classical representation thus takes the accident as its object, but it incorporates the accident into an optical organization that makes it something well founded (a phenomenon) or a "manifestation" of essence. There are laws of the accident; and certainly painting, for example, 1 25 Francis Bacon does not simply apply laws that come from elsewhere. What painting discovers are properly aesthetic laws, which make classical representation a form of representa- tion that is organic and organized, plastic. Art can indeed be figurative, although we have seen that it was not so at first, and that figuration is only a result. If representation is related to an object, this relation is derived from the form of representation; if this object is the organism and organization, it is because representation is first of all organic in itself, it is because the form of representation first of all expresses the organic life of man as subject.5 And doubtless it is at this point that we must specify the complex nature of this optical space. For while it breaks with "haptic" vision and close viewing, it is not merely visual but refers to tactile values, even though it still subordinates them to vision. In fact, what replaces haptic space is a tactile�optical space, in which what is expressed is no longer essence but connection; that is, the organic activity of man. Despite all the talk about Greek light, the space of classical Greek art is a tactile�optical space. In it, the energy of light is given a rhythm in accordance with the order of the forms. . . . The forms refer to themselves, from themselves, in the space between the planes which they themselves sustain. Increasingly freed from the background, they are increasingly freed up for space, where the gaze receives them and gathers them together. Bu t this space is never the free space that invests and traverses the spectator.6 The contour has ceased to be geometric in order to become organic, but the organic contour acts as a mold in 1 26 Every Painter Recapitulates the Histo�y of Painting which contact is made to work toward the perfection of the optical form. Somewhat like a stick whose straightness in the water I can verify, the hand is only a servant, but i t is an absolutely necessary servant, laden with a receptive passivity. Hence, the organic contour remains unchan- ging, and is not affected by the plays of shadow and light, no matter how complex they may be, because it is a tangible contour, which must guarantee the individua- tion of the optical form through visual variations and diverse points of view.7 In short, the eye, having abandoned its haptic function and become optical, subordinated itself to the tactile as a secondary power (here again, this "organization" entails an extraordinary set of properly pictorial inventions) . But if an evolution is produced or rather, interrup- tions that destabilize organic representation it can only move in one of the following two directions: either toward the exposition oj a purely optical space, which is freed from its references to even a subordinate tactility (it is in this sense that WaHllin speaks, in the evolution of art, of a tendency "to abandon itself to the pure optical vision") ;8 or, on the contrary, toward the imposition if a violent manual space, which rebels against and suppresses the subordination, as in automatic writing, where the hand seems to be guided by a "foreign, imperious will" in order to express i tself in an independent way. These two opposed directions seem to be incarnated in Byzantine art and in Gothic or "barbarian" art. This is because Byzantine art reverses Greek art by giving such a degree of activity to the background that we no longer know where the back- ground ends and the forms begin. The plane enclosed in a dome, vault, or arch, and having become the background 1 2 7 Francis Bacon plane, owing to the distance it creates between itself and the spectator is the active support of impalpable forms that depend increasingly on the alternation of light and dark, on the purely optical play of light and shadows. The tactile referents are annulled, and even the contour ceases to be a limit, and is now the result of shadow and light, of black shores and white surfaces. It is in accordance with an analogous principle that painting, much later, in the seventeenth century, will develop rhythms of light and shadow that will no longer respect the integrity of a plastic form, but will instead make an optical form emerge out of the background. As opposed to classical representation, distant viewing no longer has to vary its distance according to this or that part, nor does it have to be confirmed by a close viewing that picks out the tactile connections, but is established directly by the whole of the painting. The eye no longer appeals to the tactile; and not only do indistinct zones become essential, but even if the object's form is in the light, its clarity communicates directly with shadows, darkness, and the background through an inner relationship that is specifically optical. The accident thereby changes status, and rather than finding laws in the "natural" organic, it finds a spiritual assumption, a "grace" or "miracle," in the independence of light (and color) : it is as if the classical organization gave way to a composition. It is no longer even essence that appears, it is rather the apparition itself that creates essence and law: things rise up and ascend into the light. The form is no longer separable from a transformation or transfiguration that, from the dark to the bright, from shadow to light, establishes "a kind of love affair kindled by a decent life," 1 28 Every Painter RecajJitulates the Hist01), �r Painting a unique tonality. But what is a composition, and how does it differ from an organization? A composition is itself an organization, but one that is in the process of disintegrating (Claude! suggested just this with regard to light) . Beings disintegrate while ascending into the light, and the emperor of Byzantium was not wrong when he set about persecuting and dispersing his artists. Even abstract painting, in its radical attempt to institute an optical space of transformation, will rely on disintegrating factors, on relations of value, of light and shadow, of clarity and obscurity, rediscovering a pure Byzantine inspiration beyond the seventeenth century: an optical code . . . . Barbarian or Gothic art (in Worringer's broad sense of the term) also dismantles organic representation, but in a completely d ifferent manner. We are no longer directed toward the purely optical. On the contrary, the tactile once again assumes its pure activity; it is restored to the hand and given a speed, a violence, and a life that the eye can barely follow. Worringer has described this "north- ern line," which goes to infinity either by continually changing direction, perpetually twisting, splitting, and breaking offfrom itself; or e!se by turning back on itself in a violent peripheral or whirling movement. Barbarian art goes beyond organic representation in two ways, either through the mass of the body in movement, or through the speed and changing direction of the flat line. Worringer discovered the formula of this frenetic line: it is a life, but the most bizarre and intense kind of life, a nonorganic vitality. I t is an abstraction, but an expression- istic abstraction.9 It is thus opposed to the organic life of classical representation, but also to the geometric line of Egyptian essence, and the optical space of luminous 1 29 Francis Bacon apparition. Neither form nor ground exists any longer, in any sense, because the powers of the line and the plane tend to be equalized: by constantly being broken, the line becomes more than a line, while at the same time the plane becomes less than a surface. As for the contour, the line does not delimit one; it is never the outline of anything, either because the line is swept along by the infinite movement, or else because it alone possesses an outline, like a ribbon, as the limit of the movement of the inner mass. If this Gothic line is also animalistic, or even anthropomorphic, it is not in the sense that it would rediscover forms, but because it is composed of strokes [ traits] that confer on it an intense realism traits of the body or the head, traits of animality or humanity. It is a realism of deformation, as opposed to the idealism of transformation; and the strokes do not constitute zones of indistinctness in the form, as in chiaroscuro, but zones of indiscernibility in the line, insofar as it is common to different animals, to the human and the animal, and to pure abstraction (serpent, beard, ribbon) . If there is a geometry here, it is a very different geometry from that of Egypt or Greece; it is an operative geometry of the trait or the accident. The accident is everywhere, and the line never ceases to encounter obstacles that force it to change direction, and to intensify itself through these changes. I t i s a manual space, a space of active, manual strokes, which works through manual aggregates rather than through luminous disaggregation. One also finds in Michel- angelo a power that stems directly from this manual space, namely, the manner in which the body exceeds the organism or makes it fall apart. It is as if the organisms were caught up in a whirling or serpentine movement 1 30 Every Painter Recapitulates the HistOl) rif' Painting that gives them a single "body" or unites them in a single "fact, " apart from any figurative or narrative connection, Claudel can speak of a peinture a la truelle, a "trowel painting" in which the manipulated body is placed in a vault or a cornice, as if it were on a rug, garland, or ribbon, within which i t executes i ts " little feats of strength." l0 It is as if a purely manual space were taking its revenge, for if the eyes that judge still maintain their accuracy, the hand that manipulates has discovered how to free itself from them. I I I t would be wrong, however, to oppose these two tendencies toward a purely optical space and toward a purely manual space as if they were incompatible. At the very least, what they have in common is the dismantling of the tactile-optical space of so-called classic representation, and as such they can enter into new and complex combinations and correlations. For example, when light is liberated and becomes independent of forms, the curved form, for i ts part, tends to be decomposed into flat strokes that change direction, or even into strokes dispersed inside the mass . 1 2 One no longer knows if the accidents of the form are determined by the optical light, or if the accidents of light are determined by the manual line. It is enough to look at a Rembrandt painting upside down and close up to discover the manual line as the reverse of optical light . One could say that the optical space has itself liberated new tactile values (and also the reverse) . And things become even more complicated if one considers the problem of color. First of all, color, like light, seems to belong to a purely optical world, and at the same time seems to maintain its 1 3 1 Francis Bacon independence in relation to the form. Color, like light, begins to take control of the form, rather than simply to be related to it. This is what Wolffiin means when he says that, in an optical space where colors are more or less indifferent, it matters little "whether we speak of colors or only light or dark spaces. " 1 3 But things are not so simple. For color itself is capable of two very different kinds of relation: relations oj value, based on the contrast of black and white, in which a tone is defined as either dark or light, saturated or rarefied; and relations of tonality, based on the spectrum, on the opposition of yellow and blue, or green and red, in which this or that pure tone is defined as warm or coo1 . 1 4 It is obvious that these two scales of color continually mix with one another, and that their combinations constitute powerful acts of painting. Byzantine mosaic, for example, was not satisfied with making black shores and white surfaces (or the saturated tone of blue enamel and the same transparent tone of marble) resonate together in a modulation of light; it also made its four pure tones (gold, red, blue, and green) play together in a modulation of color: it invented colorism as well as luminism. 15 Seventeenth-century painting pur- sued both the liberation of light and the emancipation of color in relation to the tangible form. And Cezanne often made the two systems coexist, the first through a local tone, shadow and light, shaped by chiaroscuro, the second through a sequence of tones in the order of the spectrum, a pure modulation of color that tends to be self- sufficient. 1 6 But even when the two kinds of relation work together, we cannot conclude that, being addressed to sight, they thereby serve one and the same optical space. I f it is true that relations of value, modeling in 1 32 Every Painter Recapitulates the Histo�y of Paintill/!, chiaroscuro, or the modulation oflight appeal to a purely optical function of distant vision, the modulation of color, on the contrary, recreates a properly haptic function, in which the juxtaposition of pure tones arranged gradually on the flat surface forms a progression and a regression that culminates in a close vision. Thus, it is through very different means that color is conquered in light, or that light attains color ("it is through the oppositions of warm and cool tones that the colors used by the painter without any absolute luminous quality in themselves come to represent light and shadow") P Was this not already the great difference between Newton and Goethe from the point of view of a theory of colors? We will be able to speak of optical space only when the eye fulfills a function that is itself optical, depending on the prevailing or even exclusive relations of value. On the contrary, when relations of tonality tend to eliminate relations of value, as in Turner, Monet, or Cezanne, we will speak of a haptic space and a haptic function of the eye, in which the planar character of the surface creates volumes only through the different colors that are arranged on it . Are there not two very different kinds of gray, the optical gray of black-white and the haptic gray of green-red? It is no longer a manual space that is opposed to the optical space of sight, nor is it a tactile space that is connected to the optical. Now, within sight itself, there is a haptic space that competes with optical space. The latter was defined by the opposition of bright and dark, light and shadow; but the former, by the relative opposition of warm and cool, and the corres- ponding eccentric or concentric movement of expansion or contraction (whereas the bright and dark instead attest 1 33 Francis Bacon to an "aspiration" to movement) . IH Still other oppositions follow from this: as different as it may be from an external tactile mold, optical modeling in chiaroscuro still acts like a mold that has been internalized, in which the light penetrates the mass unequally. There is even an intimacy linked to the optical, which is precisely what colorists cannot tolerate in chiaroscuro, the idea of a "home" or even a "homely atmosphere," even ifit could be extended to the whole world. 19 So while the painting of light or value indeed broke with the figuration that resulted from a tactile-optical space, i t still conserves a menacing relation with a possible narration (we represent what we think we can touch, but we narrate what we see, what seems to be happening in the light or what we presume is happening in the shadows) . And the way luminism escapes from this danger of storytelling is by taking refuge in a pure code of black and white, which raises inner space to an abstraction. By contrast, colorism is the analogical language of painting: if there is still molding by color, it is no longer even an interior mold, but a temporal, variable, and continuous mold, to which alone the name of modulation belongs, strictly speaking.20 There is neither an inside nor an outside, but only a continuous creation of space, the spatializing energy of color. By avoiding abstraction, colorism avoids both figuration and narration, and moves infinitely closer to the pure state of a pictorial "fact" which has nothing left to narrate. This fact is the constitution or reconstitution of a haptic function of sight. One might say that a new Egypt rises up, composed uniquely of color and by color, an Egypt of the accident, the accident which has i tself become durable. 134 Chapter 15 Bacon) 5 Path The haptic world and i ts avatars Colorism A new modulation From Van Gogh and Gauguin to Bacon - The two aspects of color: bright tone and broken tone, field and Figure, shores and flows . . . A great painter never recapitulates the history of painting in his own work in an eclectic manner. Nor does this history correspond directly to the painter's periods, though the periods may have an indirect relation to it . I t does not even correspond to the separate aspects of a given painting. Rather, it would be like the space covered by the unity of a single, simple gesture. The historical recapitulation consists of stopping points and passages, which are extracted from or reconstitute a open sequence. Bacon first of all seems to be an Egyptian. This is his first stopping point. A painting by Bacon has an Egyptian look to it : the form and the ground, connected to each other by the contour, lie on a single plane of a close, haptic vision. But we can already discern an important difference creeping into the Egyptian world like a first catastrophe the form collapses, it is inseparable from a fall. The form is no longer essence, but becomes accident; humankind is an accident. The accident opens up a space between the two planes, which is where the fall occurs. I t is as if the 1 35 Fran(is Bacon ground receded a li ttle into a background plane, and the form moved up a little into a foreground plane. This qualitative difference, however, is not quantitatively large, for what separates the background from the foreground is not perspective, but a "shallow" depth. This is enough, however, to make the beautiful unity of the haptic world seem doubly broken. The contour ceases to be the common limit of the form and the ground on a single plane ( the round area, the ring) . I t becomes the cube, or its analogues; and in so doing, the cube becomes the organic contour of the form the mold. This marks the birth of the tactile-optical world. In the foreground plane, the form appears to be tangible, and owes its very clarity to this tangibility (figuration follows from this, as a con- sequence) . This form of representation also affects the ground insofar as, in the background plane, it curls around the form, producing a connection which is itself tactile. But in the other direction, the ground of the background plane attracts the form. And here it is a pure optical world that tends to free itself, at the very moment when the form loses its tactile character. Sometimes it is light that gives the form a clarity which is purely optical and aerial, dis aggregating; sometimes, on the contrary, it is the "rnalerisch" shadow, the darkening of color, which overcomes the form and dissolves it, severing it from all its tactile connections. The danger now is no longer simply that of figuration, but that of narration (What is happening? What is going to happen? or What happened?) . Figuration and narration are only effects, but for that reason they are all the more intrusive in painting. They are what must be eliminated. But neither the tactile- optical world nor the purely optical world are stopping 1 36 Bacon's Path points for Bacon. On the contrary, he cuts through them, subverting and scrambling them. The manual diagram produces an irruption like a scrambled or cleaned zone, which overturns the optical coordinates as well as the tactile connections. Yet one might think that the diagram is essentially optical, either because it tends toward white or, with all the more reason, because it tends toward black and works with shadows or dark colors, as in the malerisch period . But Bacon continually denounces the annoying "intimacy" or "homely atmosphere" of chiaro- scuro, and calls for a painting that will take the image "away from the interior and the home. ' " If Bacon renounces the malerisch treatment, it is because of this ambiguous association. For even when darkened or tending toward black, the diagram forms not a relative zone of indistinction that is still optical, but an absolute zone of indiscernibility or objective indetermination that is opposed to the optical, and that forces the eye to confront this manual power as if it were a foreign power. The diagram is never an optical effect, but an unbridled manual power. I t is a frenetic zone in which the hand is no longer guided by the eye and is forced upon sight like another will , which appears as chance, accident, auto- matism, or the involuntary. It is a catastrophe, and a much more profound catastrophe than the preceding one. The optical world, and the tactile-optical world, is swept out, wiped away. If there is still an eye, it is the "eye" of a hurricane, as in Turner, which more often tends to the bright than the dark, and which designates a rest or stopping point that is always linked to an immense agitation of matter. The diagram is indeed a stopping or resting point in Bacon's paintings, but it is a stop closer to 1 3 7 Francis Bacon green and red than black and white; that is, a rest surrounded by an immense agitation, or, on the contrary, one that surrounds the most agitated kind of life . To say that the diagram, in turn, is a stopping point in the painting is not to say that i t completes or constitutes the painting; indeed, on the contrary. It acts as a relay. We have seen that the diagram must remain localized, rather than covering the entire painting (as in expression- ism) , and that something must emerge from the diagram. Even in the malerisch period, the diagram covers every- thing in appearance only. It does in fact remain localized, no longer in surface, but in depth. When the curtain striates the entire surface, it seems to be in front of the Figure, but if we look closely, we can see that in fact i t falls between the two planes, in the interval between the planes. I t occupies or fills the shallow depth, and in this sense remains localized. The diagram always has effects that go beyond it . As an unbridled manual power, the diagram dismantles the optical world, but at the same time, it must be reinjected into the visual whole, where it introduces a properly haptic world and gives the eye a haptic function. I t is color, and the relations between colors, that form this haptic world and haptic sense, in accordance with relations of warm and cool, expansion and contraction. Certainly the color that shapes the Figure and fills the fields does not depend on the diagram, but it does pass through the diagram and emerge from it. The diagram acts as a modulator, and as the common locus of warm and cool colors, of expansions and contractions. In every part of the painting, the haptic sense of color will have been made possible by the diagram and its manual intrusion. 1 38 Bacon's Path Light is time, but space is color. Painters we call "colorists" are those who tend to substitute relations of tonality for relations of value, and who "render" not only the form, but also shadow and light, and time, through these pure relations of color. Certainly it is not a question of a better solution, but of a tendency that runs through painting and leaves behind characteristic masterpieces, distinct from those that characterize other tendencies. Colorists can indeed make use of black and white, light and dark; but this is because they treat light and dark, black and white, as colors, and establish tonal relations between them.2 "Colorism" means not only that relations are established between colors (as in every painting worthy of this name) , but that color itself is discovered to be the variable relation, the differential relation, on which everything else depends. The formula of the colorists is: if you push color to its pure internal relations (hot-cold, expansion-contraction) , then you have everything. If the color is perfect, if the relations of color are developed for their own sake, then you have everything: form and ground, light and shadow, bright and dark. Clarity no longer resides in the tangible form or the optical light, but in the incomparable flash produced by complementary colors.3 Colorism claims to bring out a peculiar kind of sense from sight: a haptic sight of color-space, as opposed to the optical sight of light-time. Against the Newtonian conception of optical color, it was Goethe who laid down the first principles of such a haptic vision. The practical rules of colorism are the following: the abandonment of local tone; the juxtaposition of unblended touches; the aspiration of each color to totality by appealing to its complementary color; the contrasting of colors with their 1 39 Francis Bacon intermediaries or transitions; the prohibition of mixtures except to obtain a "broken" tone; the juxtaposition of two complementary or similar colors, one of which is broken and the other pure; the production of light and even time through the unlimited activity of color; the production of clarity through color . . . . 4 Painting not only creates its masterpieces by combining its own tendencies ( linear- tactile, luminist, colorist) , but also by differentiating and opposing them. Everything is visual in painting, but vision has at least two senses. Colorism, with its own means, merely claims to give this haptic sense back to sight, which it was forced to abandon when the planes of ancient Egypt separated and diverged. The vocabulary of colorism not only hot and cold, but " touch" [touche] , "vividness" [vij] , "seizing hold of life" [saisir sur Ie vij], "achieving clarity" [ tirer au clair] attest to this haptic sense of the eye (as Van Gogh says, a vision such that "everyone who has eyes could see clearly") . Modulation by pure and distinct tints following the order of the spectrum this was the properly Cezannean invention for attaining the haptic sense of color. But in addition to the danger of reconstituting a code, modulation had to take into account two demands: the demand for a homogeneous ground and an aerial armature, perpendic- ular to the chromatic progression; and the demand for a singular or specific form, which the size of the color patches seemed to put in question.5 This is why colorism found itself faced with this double problem: how to erect large sections of homogeneous color, creating fields that would make up the armature, while at the same time inventing singular, disconcerting, and unknown forms in variation, forms which truly have the volume of a body. Georges Duthuit, 1 40 Bacon 's Path despite his reservations, has profoundly demonstrated this complementarity of a "unitive vision" and a singularized perception as they appear in Gauguin and Van Gogh.6 The bright field and the encircled Figure, "partitioned ofl�" reviving a Japanese art, or even a Byzantine or primitive art, Gauguin's La Belle Angele . . . . [ lO4] . One might say that by splitting into these two directions, modulation is lost, color loses all its modulation hence Cezanne's severe judgments against Gauguin. But this is true only when the ground and the form, the field and the Figure, do not succeed in communicating, as if the singularity of the body were let loose on a flat, uniform, indifferent, and abstract surface. 7 In fact, we believe that modulation, which is strictly inseparable from colorism, takes on a completely new meaning and function, distinct from Cezannean modulation. One attempts to avoid any possible codifica- tion, as Van Gogh said when he boasted of being an "arbitrary colorist."8 On the one hand, no matter how uniform it may be, the bright tone of the fields seizes upon color as a passage or tendency, with very fine differences of saturation rather than of value (for example, the way in which blue or yellow tend toward red; and even if there is perfect homogeneity, there is still a virtual or "identical passage" ) . On the other hand, the body's volume will be rendered by one or more broken tones, which form another type of passage in which the color seems to have been fired and baked in a kiln. By mixing complementary colors in critical proportion, the broken tone subjects color to a heating or a firing which rivals ceramics. One of Van Gogh's paintings of the postman Roulin [111] exhibits a blue that shades into white, while the flesh of the face is treated by broken tones, "yellows, greens, violets, roses, 1 4 1 Francis Bacon reds."9 (As for the possibility of treating the body with a single broken tone this would perhaps be one of Gauguin's inventions, a revelation of Martinique or Tahiti . ) The problem of modulation thus concerns the passage of bright color in the flat field, the passage of the broken tones, and the nonindifferent relation between these two passages or movements of color. Cezanne is reproached for lacking an armature as much as the flesh. What is misunderstood is not the Cezannean modulation, but rather this other modulation that colorism discovers. It entails a change in the Cezannean hierarchy: whereas modulation in Cezanne belonged particularly to landscapes and still lifes, in this new viewpoint the primacy now moves to the portrait the painter once again becomes a portraitist . ! O This is because the flesh calls for broken tones, and the portrait is able to make the broken tones and the bright tones resonate, as the voluminous body of the head and the uniform background of the flat field . The "modern portrait" would be done in color and broken tones, as opposed to past portraits, which were done in light and blended tones. Bacon is one of the greatest colorists since Van Gogh and Gauguin . His insistent appeal to "flesh" as a property of color, in the interviews, is worthy of a manifesto. In Bacon, the broken tones produce the body of the Figure, and the bright or pure tones, the armature of the fields. "Flesh-colored whitewash" and "highly- polished steel," says Bacon. 1 1 The whole problem of modulation lies in the relation between the two, between the fleshly matter and the large uniform panels. The colors arc not blended, but have two modes of clarity: the shores of vivid color, and the flows of broken colors. 1 42 Bacon's Path Shores and flows: the latter produces the body or the Figure, the former, the armature or the field. Time i tself seems to result from color in two ways: as time that passes, in the chromatic variation of the broken tones that compose the flesh; and as the eternity of time that is, as the eternity of the passage in itself, in the monochromy of the field . This treatment of color, in turn, undoubtedly has its own dangers and i ts possible catastrophe, without which there would be no painting. The first danger, as we have seen, is that the ground would remain indifferent and inert, with an abstract and coagulated brightness. But there is yet another danger, namely, that the broken tones of the Figure would be allowed to blend together and become scrambled, losing their clarity and lapsing into a monotonous gray . 1 2 This ambiguity, from which Gauguin suffered so much, can be seen in Bacon's malerisch period: the broken tones only seem to form a mixture or a blending that ends up darkening the entire painting. But in fact, such was not the case. The dark curtain falls, but in so doing it occupies the shallow depth that separates the two planes, the foreground plane of the Figure and the background plane of the field, thereby introducing the harmonious relation between the two which, in principle, preserves their clarity throughout. But the fact remains that the malerisch period flirts with the danger, at least in terms of the optical effect i t reintroduced. This i s why Bacon will leave this period behind and, in a manner again reminiscent of Gauguin (was it not Gauguin who invented this new type of depth? ) , will leave the validity of the shallow depth intact, introducing all the possible relations between the two planes in the haptic space that is thereby constituted. 1 43 Chapter 16 Note on Color Color and the three elements of painting � Color- structure: the fields and their divisions � The role of black Color-force: Figures, flows, and broken tones � Heads and shadows � Color-contour � Painting and taste: good and bad taste We have seen that the three fundamental elements of Bacon's painting were the armature or structure, the Figure, and the contour. Doubtless there are some traits, rectilinear or curvilinear, that already delineate a contour that belongs to the armature or the Figure, thereby seeming to reintroduce a kind of tactile mold ( Gauguin and Van Gogh were criticized for this) . But these lines, on the one hand, simply serve to establish the different modalities of color; for on the other hand, there is a third contour, which no longer belongs to either the armature or the Figure, but is raised to the status of an autonomous element, as much a surface or volume as it is a line: this is the round area, the ring, the puddle or the pedestal, the bed, the mattress, the armchair, which delineate the common limit of the Figure and the armature on what is supposed to be a single plane (or almost) viewed at close range. Thus there are indeed three distinct elements. Now all three of these converge on 144 .Note Oil Color color, in color. And it is modulation that is, the relations between colors which at the same time explains the unity of the whole, the distribution of each clement, and the way each of them acts upon the others. Consider an example analyzed by Marc Le Bot. The 1 976 Figure at a Washbasin [80] is like a piece of wreckage washed downstream by a river of ocher color with circular eddies and a red reef, which prevent the unlimited expansion of color through a double spatial effect that confines the color locally and fixes it, in such a way that it is enhanced and accelerated. Broad flows of color in this way cross the space of Francis Bacon's pictures. If their space is comparable to a homogeneous and fluid mass in its monochromatism, but disrupted by breakwaters, their regime of signs cannot be derived from a geometry of stable measure. I t is derived, in this painting, from a dynamic that makes the gaze glide from the bright ocher to the red. This is why a directional arrow can be inscribed on iL l This distribution can be clearly seen. There is the large, monochrome ocher shore as the background, which provides the armature. There is the contour as an autonomous power (the reef) it is the crimson of the mattress or cushion on which the Figure is standing, a crimson that is combined with the black of the disk and contrasted with the white of the crumpled newspaper. Finally, there is the Figure, like a flow of broken tones ochers, reds, and blues. But there are still other clements. First, there is the black blind that seems to cut across the field of ocher; then the washbasin, itself a bluish broken l 45 Hancis Bacon tone; and the long curved pipe, a white marked with manual daubs of ocher, which surrounds the mattress, the Figure, and the washbasin, and which also cuts across the field. We can see the function of these secondary yet indispensable elements. The washbasin is like a second autonomous contour which surrounds the Figure's head, just as the first surrounded its foot. And the pipe is itself a third autonomous contour, whose upper half divides the field of color in half As for the blind, its role is all the more important insofar as, in keeping with a technique dear to Bacon, it falls between the field and the Figure, in such a way that it occupies the shallow depth that separates them and relates the entire painting to one and the same plane. It is a rich communication of colors. The Figure's broken tones incorporate not only the pure tone of the field but also the pure tone of the red cushion, adding to it bluish tones that resonate with the tone of the washbasin, a broken blue that contrasts with the pure red. Hence a first question: What is the mode of the shore or the field, what is the modality of color in the field, and how does the field provide the armature or structure? If we consider the particularly significant example of the triptychs, we see the large, brilliant fields of monochrome colors spread out before us oranges, reds, ochers, golden yellows, greens, violets, pinks. Now if, in the beginning, modulation could still be obtained through differences of value (as in the 1 944 Three Studies jor Figures at the Base of a Crucifixion [ I ] ) , it quickly becomes apparent that modulation must simply consist of internal variations of intensity or saturation, and that these variations them- selves change depending on relations of proximity to this or that zone of the field. These relations of proximity are 1 46 Note on Color determined in several ways. Sometimes the field itself has clear-cut sections of another intensity or even another color. This technique, it is true, is rare in the triptychs, but it often appears in the simple paintings, as in the 1 946 Painting [3] or the Pope No. II of 1960 [27] (violet sections in the green field) . Sometimes, by means of a technique frequently employed in the triptychs, the field is limited and contained, pushed back on i tself, by a large curvilinear contour that takes up at least the bottom half of the painting, forming a horizontal plane that joins the vertical field in the shallow depth. In a way, this large contour still belongs to the field, precisely because it is itself only the outer limit of other, more concise contours. Thus, in the 1 962 Three Studies Jor a Crucifixion [29] , we see the large orange contour pushing back the red field; and in Two Figures f.:ying on a Bed with Attendants [53] , the violet field is contained by the large red contour. Sometimes again, the field is interrupted only by a thin white bar that crosses it completely, as in the three faces of the beautiful rose-colored Triptych of 1 970 [62] ; and this is also the case, partially, in the Figure at a Washbasin [80 ] , where the field i s crossed by a white bar, subordinating i t to the contour. Sometimes, finally, the field rather frequently includes a band or ribbon of another color. Such is the case in the right panel of the 1 962 triptych ( Three Studies Jor a Crucifixion [29] ) , which displays a vertical green ribbon, but also in the first bullfight (Stu�y Jor Bullfight No. 1 , 1 969 [56] ) , where the orange field is accentuated by a violet ribbon (which is replaced by a white bar in the second bullfight [57] ) , and the two outer panels of a 1 974 triptych [ 75] , where a blue ribbon crosses the green field horizontally. 1 47 Francis Bacon The purest pictorial situation doubtless appears when the field is neither sectioned off, nor limited, nor even interrupted, but covers the entire painting, sometimes encompassing a mid-sized contour (for example, the orange field that encompasses a green bed in the 1 970 Studies if the Human Body [62] ) , sometimes even surround- ing a small contour on all sides ( the center panel of the 1 970 triptych [6 1 ] ) . Under these conditions, the painting becomes truly aerial, and attains a maximum of light like the eternity of a monochrome time, "Chronochromie."2 But the cases in which the ribbon crosses the field are no less interesting and important, for they manifest directly the way a homogeneous, colored field introduces subtle internal variations that depend on relations of proximity ( the same band-field structure can also be found in the work of abstract expressionists like Barnett Newman) . This produces a kind of temporal or successive perception of the field itself. Even in the other cases, where the proximity is assured by the line of a large, mid-sized, or small contour, this is a general rule: the smaller or more localized the contour is, the more aerial the triptych will be, as in the 1 970 Triptych [60] , where the blue circle and the ocher apparatuses seem to be suspended in a sky. But even here, the field becomes the object of a temporal perception that is raised to eternity as the form of time. Here then is the means by which the uniform field that is, color provides a structure or armature: it is made up intrinsically of one or more zones of proximity, which incorporates a type of contour ( the largest) or an aspect of the contour. The armature can then consist of the connection between the field and the horizontal plane as defined by a large contour, which implies an active 1 48 Note on C% r presence of the shallow depth. But it can just as easily consist of a system of linear apparatuses that suspend the Figure in the field, denying all depth ( the 1 970 Triptych [60] ) . Or finally, i t can consist in the action of a very particular section of the field that we have not yet considered : the field occasionally includes a black section, sometimes quite localized (Pope No. II, 1 960 [27J ; Three Studies for a Crucifixion, 1 962 [29] ; Portrait of George Dyer Staring into a Mirror, 1 967 [45] ; Triptych, 1 972 [70] ; Portrait of a Man Walking down Steps, 1 972 [68J ) , sometimes even flowing ( Triptych, 1 973 [73] ) , and sometimes total or constituting the entire field ( Three Studies from the Human Body, 1 967 [44] ) . Now this black section does not produce the same effect as the other possible sections. It assumes the role that had been given to the curtain or blended colors in the malerisch period; it makes the field of color project itself forward, no longer either affirming or denying the shallow depth, but filling it completely. This is particularly evident in the portrait of George Dyer. In a single instance, the 1 965 Crucifixion [35J , the black section is, on the contrary, retreating from the field, which shows that Bacon did not reach this new formula for black all at once. If we move on to the other term, the Figure, we now find ourselves before flows of color, in the form of broken tones. Or rather, the broken tones constitute the flesh of the Figures. As such, they are opposed to the mono- chrome shores in three ways: the broken tone is opposed to the tone that is perhaps the "same," but vivid, pure or complete; thickened, it is opposed to the flatness of the field; finally, it is polychromatic (except in the remark- able case ofa 1 974 triptych [74] , where the flesh is treated 1 49 Francis Bacon as a single broken green tone that resonates with the pure green of a ribbon) . When the flow of colors is polychro- matic, blues and reds often dominate, which are precisely the dominant tones of meat. Yet they appear not only in meat, but even more so in the bodies and heads of the portraits � for instance, in the large 1 970 back of a man [63] or the 1 959 portrait of Miss Muriel Belcher [26] , with its reds and blues on a green field. And above all, it is in the portraits of heads [34, 48, 49, 54] that the flow loses the alltoo-easily tragic and figurative aspect it still possessed in the meat of the crucifixions, in order to assume a series of dynamic figural values. Many of the portraits of heads also combine the dominant blue�reds with other dominant colors, notably ochers. I n each case, it is the affinity of the body or the flesh with meat that explains the treatment of the Figure through broken tones. In fact, the Figure's other elements, such as clothes and shadows, receive a different treatment: the crumpled clothes may conserve the values of bright and dark, of shadow and light; by contrast, the shadow itself, the Figure's shadow, will be treated with a pure, bright tone (hence the beautiful blue shadow in the 1 970 Triptych [60] . Thus, just as the rich flow of broken tones gives shape to the Figure's body, we can see that color attains a completely different regime than it had previously. In the first place, the flow traces millimetrical variations in the body as the content of time, whereas the monochromatic shores or fields were raised to a kind of eternity as the form of time. In the second place, and more importantly, color-structure gives way to color-force. Each dominant color and each broken tone indicates the immediate exercise of a force on the corresponding zone of the body or head; it 1 50 Note on Color immediately renders a force visible. Finally, the internal variation of the field was defined in terms of a zone of proximity, which is obtained, as we have seen, in various ways ( for example, the proximity of a ribbon) . But it is with the diagram, as the point of application or agitated locus of all forces, that the flow of colors enters into relations of proximity. This proximity can certainly be spatial, as in the case where the diagram appears in the body or the head, but it can also be topological and act at a distance, as in cases where the diagram is situated elsewhere or has spread elsewhere (for example, the 1 967 Portrait of Isabel Rawsthorne Standing in a Street in Soho [47] ) . Lastly, there remains the contour. W e are familiar with its ability to multiply itself, since it can include a large contour (for example, a rug) surrounding a mid sized contour (a chair) , which itself surrounds a small contour (a round area) . Or the three contours of the Figure at a Washbasin [80] . In all these cases, color seems to recover i ts old tactile-optical function and to be subordinated to the closed line. Most notably, the large contours have a curvilinear or angular line that indicates the manner in which a horizontal plane is freed from the vertical plane in the minimal depth. Yet color is subordinated to the line in appearance only. Precisely because this contour is not here the contour of the Figure but is executed as an autonomous element of the picture, this element is determined by color in such a way that the line is derived from it, and not the reverse. I t is thus color that still creates the line and the contour. Many large contours, for example, are treated as rugs (Man and Child, 1 963 [32] ; Three Studies for a Portrait of Lucian Freud, 1 966 [38] ; Portrait of George Dyer Staring into a Mirror, 1 967 1 5 1 Francis Bacon [45J ) , and seem to constitute a decorative regime of color. This third regime can be seen even better in the existence of the small contour, within which the Figure is erected and which can deploy delightful colors for example, the perfect lilac oval in the central panel of the 1 9 72 Triptych [70] , which gives way to an uncertain rose-colored pool in the left and right panels; or the golden-orange oval that radiates from the door in the 1 978 Painting [8 1 J . In these contours, we recover a function that is derived from the halos of premodern painting. Now placed at the foot of the Figure, in a profane use, the halo still retains its function as a concentrated reflector of the Figure, a colored pressure that ensures the Figure's balance, and makes one regime of color pass into another.3 Colorism ( modulation) does consist not only of relations of warm and cool, of expansion and contraction, which vary in accordance with the colors considered. I t also consists of regimes of colors, the relations between these regimes, and the harmonies between pure tones and broken tones. What is called haptic vision is precisely this sense of colors. This sense, or this vision, concerns all the more the totality insofar as the three elements of painting (armature, Figure, and contour) communicate and converge in color. One might ask whether this implies a kind of superior "good taste," as Michael Fried has done with regard to certain colorists: Can taste be a potentially creative force and not simply an arbiter of fashion?4 Does Bacon owe this taste to his past as a decorator? Bacon's good taste would seem to have been exercised most intensely in the armature and the regime of the fields. But just as the Figures sometimes have forms and colors that make them look like monsters, so the contours themselves 1 52 Note on Color sometimes appear to be in "bad taste ," as if Bacon's irony were exercised as a preference against decoration. Most notably, when the large contour is presented as a rug, it always seems to have a particularly ugly pattern. Commenting on Man and Child [32] , Russell goes so far as to say that the carpet itself is of a particularly hideous kind. Having once or twice espied Bacon walking by himself in just such a street as the Tottenham Court Road, I know with what a concentrated and baleful stare he examines shop-windows of this sort. (There are no carpets in his own apartment . ) ".') Nonetheless, the appearance i tself refers only to figura- tion . The Figures seem to be monsters only from the viewpoint of a lingering figuration, but they cease to be so as soon as they are considered "figurally," because they then reveal the most natural of poses, in accordance with the everyday task that occupies them and the momentary forces that are confronting them. In the same way, the most hideous rug ceases to be hideous when one comprehends it "figurally," depending on the function that it exercises in relation to color. The rug in Man and Child [32] , with its red veins and blue zones, decomposes the vertical field of violet horizontally, and makes us pass from the pure tone of the latter to the broken tones of the Figure. It is a color-contour, more like white water lilies than an ugly rug. There is indeed a creative taste in color, in the different regimes of color, which constitute a properly visual sense of touch, or a haptic sense of sight. 1 53 Chapter 17 The Eye and the Hand Digital, tactile, manual, and haptic The practice of the diagram On "completely different" relations Michelangelo: the pictorial fact The two definitions of painting, by line and color, and by the trait and the color-patch, do not overlap exactly, for the first is visual, but the second is manual. To describe the relationship of the eye and the hand, and the values through which this relation passes, it is obviously not enough to say that the eye judges and the hands execute. The relationship between the hand and the eye is infinitely richer, passing through dynamic tensions, logical reversals, and organic exchanges and substitutions ( Focillon's famous text "In Praise of Hands" does not seem to me to give an account of this) . 1 The paintbrush and the easel can express a general subordination of the hand, but no painter has ever been satisfied with the paintbrush . There are several aspects in the values of the hand that must be distinguished from each other: the digital, the tactile, the manual proper, and the haptic. The digital seems to mark the maximum subordination of the hand to the eye: vision is internalized, and the hand is reduced to the finger; that is, it intervenes only in order to choose the units that correspond to pure visual forms. 1 54 The Eye and the Hand The more the hand is subordinated in this way, the more sight develops an "ideal" optical space, and tends to grasp its forms through an optical code. But this optical space, at least in i ts early stages, still presents manual referents with which i t is connected. We will call these virtual referents (such as depth, contour, relief, and so on) tactile referen ts. This relaxed su bordination of the hand to the eye, in turn, can give way to a veritable insubordina- tion of the hand : the painting remains a visual reality, but what is imposed on sight is a space without form and a movement without rest, which the eye can barely follow, and which dismantles the optical. We will call this reversed relationship the manual. Finally, we will speak of the haptic whenever there is no longer a strict subordina- tion in either direction, either a relaxed subordination or a virtual connection, but when sight discovers in itself a specific function of touch that is uniquely its own, distinct from its optical function . 2 One might say that painters paint with their eyes, but only insofar as they touch with their eyes. And no doubt this haptic function was able to reach its fullness, directly and immediately, in ancient forms whose secret we have lost ( Egyptian art ) . But it can also be recreated in the "modern" eye, through violence and manual insubordination. Let us begin with tactile-optical space, and with figuration. Not that these two characteristics are the same thing: figuration or the figurative appearance are rather like the consequence of this space. According to Bacon, this kind of space will inevitably be there, in one way or another: one has no choice in the matter ( it will at least be there virtually, or in the head of the painter . . . and figuration will be there, preexistent or prefabricated) . 3 1 55 Francis Bacon Now what will disrupt this space and its consequences, in a catastrophe, is the manual "diagram," which is made up exclusively of insubordinate color-patches and traits. And something must emerge from this diagram, and present itself to view. Roughly speaking, the law of the diagram, according to Bacon, is this: one starts with a figurative form, a diagram intervenes and scrambles it, and a form of a completely different nature emerges from the diagram, which is called the Figure. Bacon first cites two examples .4 In the 1 946 Painting [3] , he had wanted " to make a bird alighting on a field," but the lines he had drawn suddenly took on a kind of independence and suggested "something totally different," the man under the umbrella. And in the portraits of heads, the painter looks for organic resemblance, but sometimes "the paint moving from one contour into another" happens to liberate a more profound resemblance in which the organs (eyes, nose, mouth) can no longer be discerned. Precisely because the diagram is not a coded formula, these two extreme examples allow us to bring out the complementary dimensions of the operation. We might assume that the diagram makes us pass from one form to another for example, from a bird-form to an umbrella-form and thus that it acts as an agent of transformation. But this is not the case in the portraits, where we move across only a single form. And with regard to Painting [3] , Bacon even states explicitly that we do not pass from one form to another. In effect, the bird exists primarily in the intention of the painter, and it gives way to the whole of the really executed painting or, if one prefers, to the umbrella series man below, meat 1 56 The Eye and the Hand above. Moreover, the diagram can be found, not at the level of the umbrella, but in the scrambled zone, below and to the left, and it communicates with the whole through the black shore. It is from the diagram at the center of the painting, at the point of close viewing that the entire series emerges as a series of accidents "mounting on top of another."5 I f we start with the bird as an intentional figurative form, we see that what corresponds to this form in the painting, what is truly analogous to it, is not the umbrella-form (which merely defines a figurative analogy or an analogy of resemb- lance) , but the series or the figural whole, which constitutes the specifically aesthetic analogy: the arms of the meat which are raised as analogues to wings, the sections of the umbrella which are falling or closing, the mouth of the man as a jagged beak. What is substituted for the bird is not another form, but completely different relations, which create a complete Figure as the aesthetic analogue of the bird ( relations between the arms of the meat, the sections of the umbrella, the mouth of the man ) . The diagram-accident has scrambled the inten- tional figurative form, the bird: it imposes nonformal color-patches and traits that function only as traits of birdness, of animality. It is from these nonfigurative traits that the final whole emerges, as if from a pool; and it is they that raise it to the power of the pure Figure, beyond the figuration contained in this whole. Thus the diagram acted by imposing a zone of objective indiscernibility or indeterminability between two forms, one of which was no longer, and the other, not yet: it destroys the figuration of the first and neutralizes that of the second. And between the two, it imposes the Figure, through its 157 Francis Bacon original relations. There is indeed a change of form, but the change of form is a deformation; that is , a creation of original relations which are substituted for the form: the meat that flows, the umbrella that seizes, the mouth that is made jagged. As the song says, "I 'm changing my shape, I feel like an accident ."6 The diagram has introduced or distributed formless forces throughout the painting, which have a necessary relation with the deformed parts, or which are made use of as, precisely, "places. " We thus see how everything can be done inside the same form (second case) . Thus, for a head, one starts with the intentional or sketched out figurative form. One scrambles it from one contour to the other, like a gray that spreads i tself everywhere. But this gray is not the undifferentiated gray of white and black; it is the colored gray, or rather the coloring gray, out of which new relations will emerge ( broken tones) that are completely different from relations of resemblance. And these new relations of broken tones produce a more profound resemblance, a nonfigurative resemblance for the same form; that is, a uniquely figural Image.7 Hence Bacon's program: to produce resemblance with nonresembling means. And when Bacon tries to think of a very general formula capable of expressing the diagram and its action of scrambling and rubbing, he can propose a linear formula as much as a colorist one, a trait-formula as much as a patch-formula, a distance-formula as much as a color-formula. The figurative lines will be scrambled by extending them, by hatching them; that is , by introdu- cing new distances and new relations between them, out of which the nonfigurative resemblance will emerge: "you 1 58 The Eye and the Hand suddenly see through the graph [diagramme] that the mouth could go right across the face." There is a diagrammatical line of desert-distance, just as there is a diagrammatical patch of gray-color, and the two come together in the same action of painting, painting the world in Sahara gray ( "you would love to be able in a portrait to make a Sahara of the appearance to make it so like, yet seeming to have the distances of the Sahara") .8 But Bacon's demand always remains valid: the diagram must remain localized in space and time, it must not cover the entire painting, which would be "sloppy" (we would once again fall in to an undiffer- entiated gray, or a line of the "marshland" rather than the desert) . 9 Being itself a catastrophe, the diagram must not create a catastrophe. Being itself a zone of scrambling, it must not scramble the painting. Being a mixture, i t must not mix colors, but break tones. In short, being manual, it must be reinjected into the visual whole, in which it deploys consequences that go beyond it. The essential point about the diagram is that it is made in order for something to emerge from it, and if nothing emerges from it, it fails. And what emerges from the diagram, the Figure, emerges both gradually and all at once, as in Painting [3] , where the whole is given all at once, while the series is at the same time constructed gradually. This is because, if we consider the painting in i ts reality, the heterogeneity of the manual diagram and the visual whole indeed indicates a difference in nature or a leaped as if we leapt a first time from the optical eye to the hand, and a second time from the hand to the eye. But if we consider the painting as a process, there is 1 59 Francis Bacon instead a continual injection of the manual diagram into the visual whole, a "slow leak," a "coagulation," an "evolution," as if one were moving gradually from the hand to the haptic eye, from the manual diagram to haptic vision. 10 But this passage, whether abrupt or gradual, is the great moment in the act of painting. For it is here that painting discovers, deep in itself and in its own manner, the problem of a pure logic: how to pass from the possibility of fact to the fact itself? I I For the diagram was only a possibility of fact, whereas the painting exists by making present a very particular fact, which we will call the pictorial fact. In the history of art, it was perhaps Michelangelo who made us grasp the existence of such a fact most forcefully. What we will call a "fact" is first of all the fact that several forms may actually be included in one and the same Figure, indissolubly, caught up in a kind of serpentine, like so many necessary accidents continually mounting on top of one another. 12 Hence The Holy Family [ 1 07 ] : the forms may be figurative, and there may still be narrative relations between the characters but all these connections disappear in favor of a "matter of fact" or a properly pictorial (or sculptural) ligature, which no longer tells a story and no longer represents anything but its own movement, and which makes these apparently arbitrary elements coagulate in a single continuous flow . 1 3 Certainly there is still an organic representation, but even more profoundly, we witness the revelation of the body beneath the organism, which makes organisms and their elements crack or swell, imposes a spasm on them, and puts them into relation with forces sometimes with an inner force that arouses 1 60 The Eye and the Hand them, sometimes with external forces that traverse them, sometimes with the eternal force of an unchanging time, sometimes with the variable forces of a flowing time. A piece of meat, a large back of a man: it is Michelangelo who inspires this in Bacon. And here again, the body seems to enter into particularly mannered postures, or is weighed down by stress, pain, or anguish. But this is true only if a story or a figuration is reintroduced : figurally speaking, these are actually the most natural of postures, as if we caught them "between" two stories, or when we were alone, listening to a force that had seized us. I t was with Michelangelo, with mannerism, that the Figure or the pictorial fact was born in i ts pure state, and which would no longer need any other justification than "an acrid and strident polychromy, striated with flashes, like a metal plate ." Everything is now brought into the clear, a clarity greater than that of the contour and even of light. The words Leiris uses to describe Bacon hand, touch, seizure, capture evoke this direct manual activity that traces the possibility of fact: we will capture the fact, just as we will "seize hold of life." But the fact itself, this pictorial fact that has come from the hand, is the formation of a third eye, a haptic eye, a haptic vision of the eye, this new clarity. It is as if the duality of the tactile and the optical were surpassed visually in this haptic function born of the diagram. 1 6 1 Index of Paintings Numbers in brackets in the text refer to the corresponding painting in the chronological l ist below. The numbers following each entry refer to the page numbers where Deleuze discusses or mentions the painting. 1944 [ I ] Triptych, Three Studies for Figures at the Base of a Crucifixion, 1 944. Oil and pastel on hardboard, each panel 94 x 74 cm. The Tate Gallery, London. 75, 77 , 1 46 1945 [2] Figure in a Landscape, 1 945. Oil and pastel on canvas, 1 45 x 1 28 cm. The Tate Gallery, London. 4 1946 [3] Painting, 1 946. Oil and tempura on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 32 cm. Museum of Modern Art, New York. 1 7 , 24, 26, 28, 66, 1 47 , 1 56 ( twice) , 1 59 [4] Figure Study I, 1 945-6. Oil on canvas, 1 23 x 1 05.5 em. Private collection, Great Britain. 4 1949 [5] Head II, 1 949. Oil on canvas, 80.5 x 65 cm. Ulster Museum, Belfast . 4 162 Index oj Paintings [6] Head VI, 1 949. Oil on canvas, 93 x 77 cm. The Arts Council of Great Britain, London. I , 1 6 1950 [7] Fragment oj a Crucifixion, 1 950. Oil and cotton wool on canvas, 1 40 x 1 08.5 cm. Stedelijk Van Abbemuseum, Eindhoven. 26 1952 [8] Landscape, 1 952. Oil on canvas, 1 39.5 x 1 98.5 cm. Brera Museum, Milan. 5 [9] Study of a Figure in Landscape, 1 952. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 37 cm. The Phillips Collection, Washington, D.C. 5 [ 1 0] Study fOT Crouching Nude, 1 952. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 3 7 cm. Detroit I nstitute of Arts. 30 1953 [ I I ] Study JOT a Portrait, 1 953. Oil on canvas, 1 52.5 x 1 1 8 cm. Kunsthalle, Hamburg. 28, 29, 5 1 [ 1 2] Two Figures, 1 953. Oil on canvas, 1 52 X 1 16 .5 em. Private collection, Great Britain. 66 [ 1 3] Triptych, Three Studies of the Human Head, 1 953. Oil on canvas, each panel 6 1 x 5 1 cm. Private collection, Switzerland. 28, 5 1 , 75, 84 [ 1 4] Study of a Baboon, 1 953 . Oil on canvas, 198 x 1 37 cm. Museum of Modern Art, New York. 5 [ 1 5] Man with Dog, 1 953. Oil on canvas, 1 52 x 1 1 7 em. Albright Knox Art Gallery, Buffalo (gift of Seymour H. Knox) . 6, 30 [ 1 6] Study after Velazquez's Portrait of Pope Innocent X, 1 953. Oil on canvas, 1 53 x 1 1 8 cm. Des Moines Art Center, Iowa. 28, 29, 60 1954 [ 1 7] Two Figures in the Grass, 1 954. Oil on canvas, 1 52 x 1 1 7 cm. Private collection, Paris. 5, 66 [ 1 8] Sphinx, 1 954. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Brera Museum, Milan. 1 23 1 63 Index Q[ Paintings 1955 [ 1 9] Pope, 1 955. Oil on canvas, 1 52.5 x 1 16 .5 cm. Private collection, Switzerland. 28, 5 1 [20] Study Jor Portrait II, after the Life Mask oj William Blake, 1 955. Oil on canvas, 61 x 51 cm. The Tate Gallery, London. 25 [2 I ] Study Jor Portrait III, after the Life Mask rif William Blake, 1 955. Oil on canvas, 61 x 5 1 cm. Private collection. 25 1956 [22] Man Carrying a Child, 1 956. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 42 cm. Private collection. 40 1957 [23] Study Jor a Portrait oj Van Gogh II, 1 957 . Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 . 5 cm. Edwin Janss Thousand Oaks Collection, Califor- nia. 4, 40 [24] Study Jor the Nurse in the Film (Battleship Potemkin', 1 957 . Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 42 cm. Stadelsches Kunstinstitut und Stadtische Galerie, Frankfurt. 28, 60 1959 [25] Lying Figure, 1 959. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 42 cm. Kuntsammlung Nordrhein-Westfalen, DUsseldorf. 23 [26] Miss Muriel Belcher, 1 959. Oil on canvas, 74 x 67.5 cm. Gilbert Halbers Collection, Paris. 26, 1 50 1960 [27] Pope No. II, 1 960. Oil on canvas, 1 52 .5 x 1 1 9 .5 cm. Private collection, Switzerland. 26, 1 47 , 1 49 1961 [28] Reclining Woman, 1 96 1 . Oil on canvas, 1 98.5 x 1 4 1 .5 cm. The Tate Gallery, London. 23 1 64 Index of Paintings 1962 [29] Triptych, Three Studiesfor a Crucifixion, 1 962. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 45 cm. The Solomon R. Guggenheim Museum, New York. 23, 26, 74, 76, 77 , 1 47 ( twice) , 1 49 [30] Turning Figure, 1 962. Oil on canvas, 198 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private collection, New York. 40 1963 [ 3 1 ] loving Figure with Hypodermic Syringe, 1 963. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 147 .5 cm. Private collection Switzerland. 1 7 , 23 [32J Man and Child, 1 963. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. McCrory Corporation Collection, New York. 70, 1 5 1 , 1 53 ( twice) 1964 [33] Triptych, Three Figures in a Room, 1 964. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Musee national d'Art moderne, Centre Georges- Pompidou, Paris. 76, 78 [34] Triptych, Three Studiesfor a Portrait of George Dyer (on Light Ground) , 1 964. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. Private collection. 58, 1 50 1965 [35] Triptych, Cruczfixion , 1 965 . Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Staatsgalerie Moderner Kunst, M unich. 23, 26, 74 , 76 ( twice) , 78, 1 49 [36] After Muybridge Woman Emptying a Bowl of Water and Paralytic Child on All Fours, 1 965. Oil Oil canvas, 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. Stedelijk Museum, Amsterdam. 40 1966 [ 3 7 ] Portrait of George Dyer Talking, 1 966. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private collection, New York. I 1 65 Index of Paintings [38] Triptych, Three Studies for a Portrait of Lucian Freud, 1 966. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 X 1 47.5 cm. Marlborough In ternational Fine Art. 2, 3, 76, 78, 1 5 1 [39] Portrait of George Dyer Staring at Blind Cord, 1 966. Oil on canvas, 1 98 X 1 47 .5 cm. Maestri Collection, Parma. 40 [40] Portrait of George Dyer Riding a Bicycle, 1 966. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 147 .5 cm. Jerome L. Stern Collection, New York. 4 1 [4 1 ] Stur[y of Isahel Rawsthorne, 1 966. Oil o n canvas, 35.5 x 30.5 cm. Michel Leiris Collection, Paris. 42 1967 [42] Portrait of George Dyer and Lucian Freud, 1 967. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 147.5 em. (Destroyed in a fire.) 40 [43] Three Studies of Isabel Rawsthorne, 1 967 . Oil on canvas, 1 19.5 x 1 52.5. Nationalga1erie, Berlin. 1 3 [44] Three Studies from the Human Body, 1 967 . Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 147 . 5 cm. Private collection. xv, 1 5 , 1 49 [45] Portrait of George Dyer Staring into a Mirror, 1 967. Oil on canvas, 1 98 X 1 47.5 em. Private collection, Caracas. 1 8, 1 49, 1 52 [46] Triptych Inspired by T. S. Eliot's Poem 'Sweeney Agonistes' , 1 967. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. The Hirshhorn Museum and Sculpture Garden, Washington, D.C. 26, 76 ( twice) , 77 [47] Portrait of Isahel Rawsthorne in a Street in Soho, 1 967. Oil on canvas, 1 98 X 1 47.5 cm. Nationalgalerie, Berlin. 1 5 1 [48] Triptych, Three Studies for a Self-Portrait, 1 967. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 147.5 cm. Private collection. 58, 1 50 [49] Four Studies for a Self-Portrait, 1 967. Oil on canvas, 9 1 .5 x 33 em. Brera M useum, Milan. 58, 1 50 1 66 Index 0/ Paintings 1968 [50] Two Studies for a Portrait q{ George iJ.yer, 1 968. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Sara Hilden Tampere Collection, Finland. 50 [5 1 ] Portrait of George Dyer in a Mirror, 1 968. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 . 5 cm. Thyssen-Bornemisza, Lugano. 1 8 [52] Two Studies of George Dyer with a Dog, 1 968. Oil and pastel on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Gilbert de Botton Collection. 2 1 [53] Triptych, Two Figures Lying on a Bed with A ttendants, 1 968. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. Private collection, New York. 23, 63, 74, 78, 1 47 [54] Triptych, Three Studies of Isabel Rawsthome, 1 968. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. Mrs. Susan Lloyd Collection, Nassau. 58, 1 50 1969 [55] Triptych, Three Studies of LuciAn Freud, 1 969. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private Collection, Rome. I , 3 [56] Study for Bullfight No. J, 1 969. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private collection. 1 3 , 42, 1 47 [57] Second Version of 'Study for Bullfight No. 1', 1 969. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Jerome L Stern Collection, New York. 1 3, 42, 147 [58] Lying Figure, 1 969. Oil and pastel on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private collection, Montreal. 23 [59] Study qf Nude with Figure in a Mirror, 1 969. Oil on canvas, 198 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private collection. 1 3 1970 [60] Trip�ych, 1 970. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47 .5 em. National Gallery of Australia, Canberra. 1 , 3 , 1 5, 66, 76, 78, 84, 1 48, 1 49, 1 50 1 6 7 Index of Paintings [6 1 ] Triptych, Studies from the Human Body, 1970. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Jacques Hachuel Collection, New York. 1 , 3, 66, 74, 76, 77 , 78, 92, 1 48 [62] Triptych, Studies of the Human Body, 1 970. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. Marlborough International Fine Art. 2, 3, 1 7 , 84, 1 47 , 1 48 [63] Triptych, Three Studies qf the Male Back, 1 970. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Kunsthaus, Zurich. xvii, 1 6, 1 8, 48, 78, 1 50 1971 [64] Study for a Portrait of Lucian Freud (Sideways) , 1 97 1 . Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private collection, Brussels. I [65] Second Version qf 'Painting, 1946', 197 1 . Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. Wallraf-Richartz M useum, Ludwig Collection. 1 7 , 26, 28 [66] Two Men Working in a Field, 1 97 1 . Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private collection, Japan. I , 3 [67] Lying Figure in a Mirror, 1 97 1 . Oil on canvas, 198 x 1 47.5 cm. M usco de Bellas Artes, Bilbao. 18, 66 1972 [68] Portrait of a Man Walking Down Steps, 1 972. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private collection, London. 40, 1 49 [69] Triptych, Three Studies of Figures on Beds, 1 972 . Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private collection, San Francisco. 66 [70] Triptych, August 1 972 . Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. The Tate Gallery, London. xviii, 50, 79, 1 49, 1 5 2 1973 [ 7 1 ] Triptych, Three Portraits, 1973 . Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 147.5 cm. Private collection, San Francisco. 50 [72] Self-Portrait, 1 973. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private collection, New York. 6, 1 9 1 68 Index of Paintings [73] Triptych, May-J une 1 973. Oil on canvas, each pand 198 x 1 47 .5 em. Saul Sternberg Collection, New York. 16, 2 1 , 4 1 , 7.1, 80, 1 49 1974 [74] Triptych, March 1 974. Oil and pastel on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private collection, Madrid. 74, 92, 1 49 [751 Triptych, May-June 1974. Oil on canvas, each panel 198 x 147.5 cm. Property of the artist. 1 7, 1 47 (76] Sleeping Figure, 1 974. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. A. Carter Pottash Collection. 63 [77 ] Seated Figure, 1 974. Oil and pastel on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Gilbert de Botton Collection. 2 1 1975 [78] Three Figures and a Portrait, 1975 . Oil and pastel on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. The Tate Gallery, London. 22 1976 [79] Triptych, 1976. Oil and pastel on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. Private collection, France. 2 1 , 42, 74 [80] Figure at a Washbasin, 1 976. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Museo de Arte Contemporaneo de Caracas. 1 5 , 80, 1 45, 1 47, 1 5 1 1978 [8 1 ] Painting, 1 978. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 147 .5 cm. Private collection, Monte Carlo. 1 4, 33, 1 52 1979 [82] Jet oj Water, 1 979. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 em. Private collection. xv, 3 1 [83] Sphinx-Portrait oj Muriel Belcher, 1 979. Oil on canvas, 193 x 147 .5 cm. National Museum of Modern Art, Tokyo. 3 1 1 69 Index rif Paintings [84] Triptych, Studies from the Human Body, 1 979. Oil on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private collection. 1980 [85] Carcass of Meat and Bird of Prey, 1980. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. Private collection. 1981 [86] Sand Dune, 1 98 1 . Oil and pastel on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. Private collection, New York. xv, 3 1 [87] Stuqy of Man Talking, 1 98 1 . Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. Private collection, Switzerland. 1982 [88] A Piece of Waste Land, 1 982. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. Property of the artist. xv, 3 1 [89) Study from the Human Body, Figure in Movement, 1 982. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. M arlborough In ternational Fine Art. [90) Study of the Human Body from a Drawing b}' Ingres, 1 982. Oil and pastel on canvas, 1 98 x 147.5 cm. Property of the artist. [9 1 ] StuqV of the Human Body, 1 982. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 147 .5 cm. Musee national d'Art moderne, Centre Georges-Pompidou, Paris. [92) Stuqv for a Self-Portrait, 1 982. Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. Private collection, New York. 1983 [93) Statue and Figures in a Street, 1 983. Oil and pastel on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47.5 cm. Property of the artist. [94] Oedipus and the Sphinx after Ingres, 1 983 . Oil on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47 .5 cm. Private collection, California. [95] .. 'ltudy from the Human Body, 1 983. Oil and pastel on canvas, 1 98 x 147 .5 cm. Menil's Foundation Collection, Houston. 1 70 Index of Paintings [96] Triptych, 1983. Oil and pastel on canvas, each panel 1 98 x 1 47.5 em. Marlborough I nternational Fine Art. [97] Sand Dune, 1 983. Oil and pastel on canvas, 1 98 x 1 47.5 em. Ernst Beyeler Collection, Basel. xv, 3 1 Paintings by Other Artists [98] Cezanne, Paul, The Bathers, 1900-6. Oil on canvas, 1 30 x 1 95 cm. National Gallery, London. 70 [99] Cezanne, Paul, A Modem Olympia ( The Pasha) , c. 1873-4. Oil on canvas, 46 x 55.5 cm. Musee d'Orsay, Paris. 88 [ 1 00] Cezanne, Paul, Woman in a Green Hat (Madame Cezanne) , 1 894--5. Oil on canvas, 1 00.2 x 8 \ .2 em. The Barnes Foundation, Merion, Pennsylvania. 88 [ 1 0 I ] Degas, Edgar, After the Bath: Woman Dr.-ying Herself, c. 1 888-92. Pastel on tracing paper, 1 04 x 98 cm. National Gallery, London. 22 [ 1 02] Duchamp, Marcel, JVilde Descending a Staircase (No. 2) , 1 9 1 2 . Oil on canvas, 1 46 x 89 cm. The Louise and Walter Arensberg Collection, Philadelphia Museum of Art. 40 [ 1 03] Duchamp, Marcel, Three Standard Stoppages, 1 9 1 31 4. Three threads glued upon three glass panels, each 1 25.4 x 1 8.4 cm. Museum of Modern Art, New York. 95 [ 1 04) Gauguin, Paul, La Belle Angele, 1 889. Oil on canvas, 92 x 73 cm. Musee d 'Orsay, Paris. 1 4 1 ( 1 05) Giotto, Ambrogio Bondone, Legend of SI Francis, Panel 1 9, Stigmatization of St. Francis, 1 297-1 300, Fresco, 270 x 230 cm. Upper Church, San Francesco, Assisi, I taly. 1 0 [ 1 06] Greco, E I (Domenico Theotocopoulos) , The Burial of the Count if Orgaz (El Entierro del Conde de Orgaz) , 1 586-8. Oil on canvas, 480 x 360cm. Iglesia de Santo Tome, Toledo, Spain. 9 [ 1 07) Michelangelo Buonarotti, The Holy Family with the Infant St. John the Baptist ( Tondo Doni) , 1504-6. Oil on canvas, 7 1 . 1 x 7 1 . 1 em. Galleria degli Uffizi, Florence. 1 60 1 7 1 Index of Paintings [ l 08] Rembrandt van Rijn, Nightwatch ( The Company of Frans Banning Coq Preparing to March Out) , 1 642. Oil on canvas, 363 x 437 cm. Rijksmuseum, Amsterdam, The Netherlands. 73 [ 1 09] Tintoretto, Jacopo, Creation of the Animals, c. 1 550, Oil on canvas, 1 5 1 x 258 cm. Gallerie dell' Accademia, Venice. 1 0 [ 1 1 0] Turner, J . M . W., Snowstorm Steam Boat off a Harbour's Mouth Making Signals in Shallow Water, and Going by the Lead, 1 842. Oil on canvas, 9 1 .5 x 1 22 cm. The Tate Gallery, London. 3 1 [ I I I ] Van Gogh, Vincent, Portrait of the Postman Joseph Roulin, Aries, early August 1 888. Oil on canvas, 8 1 .2 x 65.3 cm. Museum of Fine Arts, Boston. 1 4 1 [ 1 1 2] Velasquez, Diego, Pope Innocent X, 1 650. Oil o n canvas, 1 52.5 x 1 1 6.5 em. Galleria Doria-Pamphili, Rome. 53 1 72 Notes Notes by the translator are preceeded by the abbreviation 'TN." Author's Preface to the English Edition TN. This text first appeared in Artforum (January 1 984) , pp. 68-9, trans. Lisa Liebmann. We thank the publishers, the author, and the translator for their permission to reproduce it here, with minor emendations. 2 TN. Samuel Beckett, Le Dipeupleur [The Depopulator] (Paris: Minuit , 1 970) , translated by the author into English as The Lost Ones ( London: Calder & Boyars, 1 972 ) , p. 7. The English text is included in Samuel Beckett: The Complete Short Prose, 1929-1989, ed. S . E. Gontarski ( New York: Grove Press, 1 995) , pp. 202-23 : 202. Chapter 1: The Round Area, the Ring 1 Jean-Fran<;:ois Lyotard uses the word "figural" as a substantive in order to oppose it to the "figurative." See Discours, Figure (Paris: Klincksieck, 1 972 ) . See David Sylvester, The Brutality of Fact: Interviews with Francis Bacon 1962-1979, 3rd edn . (New York: Thames & Hudson, 1 987 ) . The critique of the "figurative" (both "illustrative" and "narrat- ive") is a constant theme of the book, which we shall cite hereafter as "Interviews." Interviews, p. 23. 4 TN. I n English in the original, and thus throughout the book. 5 Interviews, pp. 1 2-1 3 . 6 TN. " Traits asignifiants." The French word trait, like its English 1 7 3 Notes equivalent, is derived from the Latin tractus, the past participle of trahere, to draw. The term has two primary senses: etymologically, it refers to a graphic line, or, more specifically, to the action of drawing a line or set of lines (a stroke, a draft, a 'touch' in a picture) ; by extension, it is also used to designate a distinguishing quality or characteristic mark, a feature that allows one to identify or recognize a thing. Deleuze often refers to both meanings: it is the marks or strokes on the canvas that introduce traits of animality into the human figure, thereby constituting a "zone of indiscern- ibility" between the human and the animal. Since the English term is most commonly used in the latter sense, however, I have occasionally translated trait as "stroke" in those contexts where the literal meaning is predominant, that is, when Deleuze is referring to the activity of the artist's hand on the painting (as when one speaks of "a stroke of the pencil" or "brush stroke" ) . TN. Deleuze is here following the terminology of Aloi's Riegl, who distinguished between the tactile ( taktisch) perception of the work of art, for which the viewer has to be close to the object (Nahsicht) ; and an optical (optisch) perception, for which a view from a distance (Fernsicht) is best suited. I have generally translated vue proche as "close viewing" and vision eloignee as "distant viewing." Erwin Panofsky, in Meaning in the Visual Arts (Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday Anchor Books, 1 955) , notes that the German word taktisch, "normally denoting 'tactical' as opposed to 'strategic, ' is used in art-historical German as an equivalent of 'tactile' or even 'textural' as well as 'tangible' or 'palpable'" (p. 330 ) . For the term "haptic," see note 2 to Chapter 1 4. \Ve here cite the complete text: Francis Bacon: " In thinking about them as sculptures it suddenly came to me how I could make them in paint, and do them much better in paint. It would be a kind of structured painting in which images, as it were, would arise from a river of flesh. I t sounds a terribly romantic idea, but I see it very formally." David Sylvester: "And what would the form be?" Bacon: "They would certainly be raised on structures." Sylvester: "Several figures?" Bacon: "Yes, and there would probably be a pavement raised high out of its naturalistic setting, out of which they could move as though ou t of pools of flesh rose the images, if possible, of specific people walking their daily round. I hope to be 1 74 9 able to do figures arising out of their own flesh with their bowler hats and their umbrellas and make them figures as poignant as a Crucifixion" (Interviews, p. 83 ) . And on p. 1 08, Bacon adds: " I 've thought about sculptures on a kind of armature, a very large armature made so that the sculpture could slide along it and people could even alter the positions of the sculpture as they wanted." Writing of Jacques Tati, who is also a great artist of fields, Andre Bazin says, " Indistinct sound elements are rare . . . . On the contrary, Tati's shrewdness consists of destroying clarity by clarity. The dialogues are not incomprehensible but insignificant, and their insignificance is revealed by their very precision. Tati succeeds in this by deforming the relations of intensity between planes." Andre Bazin, Q;t'est-ce que Ie cinema? (Paris: Editions du Cerf, 1958 ) , vol. 1 , Ontologie et langage, p . 1 1 4. [TN. The abridged English translation of Bazin's work, What Is Cinema?, 2 vols., trans. and ed. by Hugh Gray (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1 97 1 ) , does not include this text.] 10 Michel Leiris, Au verso des images ( Montpellier: Fata Morgana, 1 975) , p. 26. [TN. For Leiris' writings on Bacon in English, see Michel Leiris, Francis Bacon: Full Face and in Profile, trans. John Weightman (New York: Rizzoli, 1 983) ; and Michel Leiris, Francis Bacon, trans. John Weightman (New York: Rizzoli, 1 998) .] Chapter 2: Note on Figuration in Past Painting See Interviews, pp. 28 -9 (Bacon is asking himself how Velasquez could stick so close to "figuration." And he answers, on the one hand, that photography did not yet exist; and on the other hand, that painting was still connected to a religious sentiment, even if it was a vague one . ) Interviews, p. 30. We will have to return to this point, which explains Bacon's attitude toward photography, which is one of both fascination and mistrust. I n any case, Bacon criticizes the photograph for something completely different than being figurative. 1 75 Notes Chapter 3: Athleticism Samuel Beckett, The Lost Ones, in Samuel Beckett: The Complete Short Prose, 1929-1989, p. 202 (see Author's Preface, note 2 ) . � Joseph Conrad, The Nigger of the "Narcissus", in The Portable Conrad, ed. Morton Dauwen Zabel (New York: Viking Press, 1 947 ) , p. 355. William S . Burroughs, Naked Lunch (New York: Grove Press, 1 959) , p. 9 1 . 4 TN. See Interviews, p. 78. Chapter 4: Body, Meat and Spirit, Becoming Animal Felix Guatarri has analyzed these phenomena of the disorganiza- tion of the face: "faciality traits" are liberated, which also become the animal traits of the head. See L'Inconscient machinique. Eliments de schizo-analyze (Paris: Recherches, 1 979) , pp. 75ff. Interviews, pp. 46-7. Franz Kafka, "The Sword," in Diaries 1914-1923, ed. Max Brod, trans. Martin Greenberg with Hannah Arendt ( New York: Schocken Books, 1 949) , pp. 1 0910 . 4 Interviews, pp. 23, 46. 5 Jean-Christoph Bailly has included extracts of this very beautiful text by Karl Philipp Moritz ( 1 756-93) , entitled Anton Reiser, in his La Legende dispersie. Anthologie du romantisme allemand ( Paris: Union Generale d'Editions, 1 976) , pp. 35-43. 6 Interviews, p. 58: "Well, if you think of the great Rembrandt self- portrait in Aix-en-Provence, for instance, and if you analyze it, you will see that there are hardly any sockets to the eyes, that it is almost completely anti-illustrational." Chapter 5: Recapitulative Note: Bacon's Periods and Aspects Inten'iews, p. 56: "You would love to be able in a portrait to make a Sahara of the appearance to make it so like, yet seeming to have the distances of the Sahara." 2 Interviews, p. 58: "I 've always wanted and never succeeded in painting the smile." 1 76 4 6 Notes Lewis Carroll, Alice in Wonderland, chapter 6: " I t vanished qui te slowly . . . ending with the grin, which remained some time after the rest of it had gone." The Complete Works of Lewis Carroll (New York: Modern Library, n .d. ) , p. 74. Interviews, p. 48. We cannot here follow John Russell, who confuses the order of the triptych with the succession of panels from left to right: he sees on the left a sign of "sociability," and in the center, a public discourse. Even if the model were a prime minister, it is not clear how the disquieting smile could pass for a sociable one, or the scream in the center, for a discourse. See John Russell, Francis Bacon, rev. ed. (New York: Oxford University Press, 1 979) , p . 94. Mal derives from "macula," the color-patch [tache] (hence malen, to paint ; Aialer, painter) . Wblffiin uses the word Malerisch to designate the pictorial in opposition to the linear, or more precisely, the mass in opposition to the contour. See Heinrich Wblffiin, Principles of Art History: The Problem of the Development of Style in Later Art, trans. M . D. Hottinger ( New York: Dover, 1 950 ) , p. 3. [TN. Following Deleuze, I have left the term rnalerisch untranslated in the text. I n justifying this practice, Herbert Read, in his introduction to W6lillin's Classic Art, trans. Peter and Linda Murray ( London: Ph aid on Press, 1 952 ) , writes that the term rnalerisch "is a word absolutely essential to the discussion of stylistic problems in art, and purists must admit i t into our language, for no other word is exact enough. It stands for that depreciation and gradual obliteration of line (outline and tangible surface) and for the merging of these in a 'shifting semblance' of things it is an attempt to represent the vague and impalpable essence of things. English readers who are familiar with the distinction Blake made between 'the hard and wiry line of rectitude' and the 'broken lines, broken masses, and broken colours,' which he denounced as 'bungling,' will have already seized the full meaning of the word" (p. vi ) . On possible E nglish equivalents, Panofsky notes that " the ubiqui tous adjective rnalerisch must be rendered, according to context, in seven or eight different ways: 'picturesque' as in 'picturesque disorder'; 'pictorial' (or, rather horribly, 'painterly') as opposed to 'plastic ' ; 'dissolved, ' 'sfumato,' or 'non-linear' as opposed to 'linear' or 1 7 7 Notes 'clearly defined'; 'loose' as opposed to ' tight'; 'impasto' as opposed to 'smooth ' " ( Pano[�ky, Meaning in the Visual Arts, p. 330) . ] On the three periods distinguished by Sylvester, see Interviews, pp. 1 1 8-20. 8 We are currently familiar with six paintings of this new abstraction other than the four previously cited, a Landscape of 1 978, and the 1 982 Water Flowing from a Faucet. Chapter 6: Painting and Sensation Henri Maldiney, Regard parole espace (Lausanne: Editions l'Age d'Homme, 1 973) , p. 1 36. Phenomenologists like Maldiney or MerIeau-Ponty see Cezanne as the painter par excellence. They analyze sensation, or rather, "sense experience" [Ie sentir] , not only insofar as it relates sensible qualities to an identifiable object ( the figurative moment) , but insofar as each quality constitutes a field that stands on its own without ceasing to interfere with the others ( the "pathic" moment) . Hegel's phenomenology short-circuits this aspect of sensation, which nonetheless forms the basis for every possible aesthetic. See Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Phenomenology oj Perception (London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1 967) , pp. 207-42, and Maldiney, pp. 1 24--208. 2 D. H. Lawrence, "Introduction to These Paintings," in Phoenix: The Posthumous Papers of D. H. Lawrence (1936) (New York: Viking Press, 1 972 ) , pp. 578-9. 3 TN. Interviews, p. 58 (and also pp. 53, 66) . 4 Interviews, p. 1 8 . Interviews, p. 63. 6 Interviews, p. 65. 7 These are all constant themes in the interviews. 8 TN. See Interviews, pp. 2 1 , 28, 43, 44, 46, 56, 58-59, 66. 9 Interviews, p. 28. 10 Interviews, pp. 84-6. I I Interviews, p. 58 ("coagulation of non-representational marks") . 1 2 TN. Interviews, p. 48. 13 Interviews, pp. 76-8 1 (and p. 47: "I have never tried to be horrific") . 14 Interviews, p. 43. Bacon seems to rebel against psychoanalytic 1 78 Notes suggestions, and when Sylvester, on another occasion, says to him that "the Pope is the Father," Bacon politely responds, ' ' I 'm not quite sure I understand what you're saying . . . " (Interviews, p. 7 1 ) . For a more developed psychoanalytic interpretation of Bacon's paintings, see Didier Anzieu, Le Corps de l'rruvre (Paris: Gallimard, 1 98 1 ) , pp. 333-40. 10 Interviews, p. 83, 1 08-1 2 . 1 6 TN. See Jean-Christophe Bailly, ed., La Legende dispersee (see Chapter 4, note 5 ) , pp. 35-43. 1 7 See Maldiney, Regard parole espace, pp. 1 47-72 , on sensation and rhythm, systole and diastole (and the pages on Cezanne in this regard ) . I S Interviews, p. 78--80. 4 6 Chapter 7: Hysteria Antonin Artaud, "The Body is the Body," trans. Roger McKeon, Semiotext(e) , vol. 2, no. 3 ( 1977 ) , pp. 38-9. Wilhelm Worringer, Form in Gothic (New York: G. P. Putnam, 1 927 ) , pp. 32 1 5 1 . William S . Burroughs, }\'aked Lunch (New York: Grove Press, 1 959) , p. 9. Burroughs, Naked Lunch, p. 1 3 1 . One might consult any nineteenth-century manual on hysteria, but see especially the study by Paul Sollier, Les Plzinomenes d' autoscopie (Paris: Alcan, 1 903) , who created the term "vigilambulator." Antonin Artaud, "The Nerve Meter," in Antonin Artaud: Selected Writings, ed. Susan Sontag, trans. Helen Weaver (New York: Farrar, Straus & Giroux, 1 976) , p. 86. Ludovic Janvier, in his Beckett par lui-me me (Paris: Seuil, 1 979) , had the idea of making a lexicon of Beckett's principal notions. These are operative concepts. The articles entitled "Corps," "Espace-* temps," " Immobilite," "Temoin," "Tete," and "Voix" ["Body," "Space-Time," " Immobility," "\Vitness," "Head," and "Voice"] should be noted in particular. Each of these articles has parallels with Bacon. And it is true that Bacon and Beckett are too close to know this themselves. But one should refer to Beckett's text on the painter Bram van Veldt, "La Peinture des van Valde, ou Ie monde 1 79 9 Notes et Ie pantalon" ( 1 948) , in Disjecta: Miscellaneous Writings and a Dramatic Fragment, ed. Ruby Cohn (New York: Grove Press, 1 984) , pp. 1 1 8-32. Many things i n i t could apply to Bacon notably the absence of figurative and narrative relations as a limit of painting. Michel Leiris has devoted a superb text to this action of "presence" in Bacon. See Ce que m'ont dit les peintures de Francis Bacon ( Paris: Maeght, 1 966) . Interviews, p. 48. 1 0 Sartrean themes such as excessive distance ( the root of the tree in Nausea) or of the flight of the body or the world (as if down the toilet drain in Being and Nothingness) have their place in a hysterical painting. I I Interviews, pp. 28-9. 12 Interviews, p. 37 . 1 3 Marcel Proust, In Search oj Lost Time, vol. 3, The Guermantes Way, trans. C. K. Scott Moncrieff and Terence Kilmartin; rev. D. J . Enright ( New York: Modern Library, 1 993) , p . 55; Marcel Proust, A fa recherche du temps perdu, Le Coti de Guermantes, Part I ( Paris: Pleiade, 1 954) , vol. 2, p. 48. 1 4 Marcel More, Le Dieu Mozart et le monde des oiseaux ( Paris: 4 Gallimard, 1 97 1 ) , p. 47 . Chapter 8: Painting Forces See Russell, Francis Bacon (see Chapter 5, note 5 ) , p. 1 23 : Duchamp "was interested in process as a subject for painting, and in the way in which a human body makes a coherent structure when it walks downstairs, even if that structure is never revealed completely at any one moment in time. Bacon's object is not to show successive appearance, but to superimpose appearances, one on top of the other, in ways different from those vouchsafed to us in life. Henrietta Moraes in the Three Studies of 1 963 is not moving from left to right or from right to left." D. H. Lawrence, "Introduction to These Paintings" (see Chapter 6, note 2 ) , p. 580. TN. Interviews, p. 48. See Bacon 's statements on the scream in Interviews, pp. 34--7 and 48-50. ( I t is true that in the latter text, Bacon regrets that his 1 80 6 4 5 Notes screams still remain " too abstract," because he thinks he has missed "what causes someone to scream." But it is a question of fclrces, not of the spectacle. ) Franz Kafka, letter to Brod, as cited in Klaus Wagenbach, Franz Kafka: annees de jeunesse, 1883-1912 ( Paris: Mercure, 1 967 ) , p. 1 56: "Diabolical powers, whatever their message might be, are knock- ing at the door and already rejoicing in the fact that they will arrive soon." Interviews, pp. 78-80: "If life excites you, its opposite, like a shadow, death, must excite you. Perhaps not excite you, but you are aware of it in the same way that you are aware of life . . . . One's basic nature is totally without hope, and yet one's nervous system is made out of optimistic stuff." (And on what Bacon calls his "greed for life," his refusal to make the game a deadly wager, see pp. 1 22 5 ) . Chapter 9 : Couples and Triptychs Interviews, p. 1 04: " I wanted to make an image which coagulated this sensation of two people in some form of sexual act on the bed . . . and if you look at the /c}rms, they're extremely, in a sense, unrepresen tational. " Russell, Francis Bacon (see Chapter 5, note 5 ) , pp. 30- \ . Marcel Proust, In Search of Lost Time, vol. 6, Time Regained, trans. C. K. Scott Moncrieff and Terence Kilmartin; rev. D. J. Enright (New York: Modern Library, 1 993) , p. 274 (translation modified) ; Marcel Proust, A La recherche du temps padu, L e Temps retrouve ( Paris: Pleiade, 1 954) , vol. 3, p. 879 . Marcel Proust, In Search of Lost Time, vol. I , Swann's Wqy, trans. C. K. Scott Moncrieff and Terence Kilmartin; rev. D. J. Enright (New York: Modern Library, 1 993) , p. 500 (translation modified and emphasis added ) ; Marcel Proust, A la recherche du temps padu, Du c6te chez Swann, Part 2 (Paris: Pleiade, 1 954) , vol. I , p. 352 . Marcel Proust, In Search �f Lost Time, vol. 5, The Captive, trans. C. K. Scott Moncrieff and Terence Kilmartin; rev. D. J. Enright (New York: Modern Library, 1 993 ) , pp. 346--7; Marcel Proust, A La recherche du temps perdu, La Prisonniere, part 2 (Paris: PJeiade, 1 954) , vol. 3, p. 260. 1 8 1 Notes I; Interviews, pp. 39-43. Interviews, pp. 63--64. H Russell, Francis Bacon (see Chapter 5, note 5 ) , p. 1 2 1 . 9 On the essential notion of the "rhythmic character," see Messiaen's analysis in Claude Samuel, Conversations with Olivier Messiaen, trans. Felix Aprahamian ( London: Stainer & Bell, 1 976) , pp. 36-8; and Antoine Galea, Rencontres avec Olivier Messiaen (Paris: Julliard, 1 96 1 ) . 1 0 Paul Claudel, The F�e Listens, trans. Elsie Pel! (Port Washington, N.Y. : Kennikat Press, 1 969) , pp. 40-8. Chapter 10: Note: What Is a Triptych? On this notion of retrogradable rhythm and, later, of added or subtracted value, see Messiaen's comments in Claude Samuel, Conversations with Olivier Messiaen (see Chapter 9, note 9 ) , pp. 43ff. I t i s not surprising that the same problems are posed i n painting, notably from the point of view of colors: Paul Klee has shown this in his practice of painting as much as in his theoretical texts. 2 Witold Gombrowicz, Pornographia, trans. Alastair Hamilton ( London: Calder & Boyars, 1 966) , p. 1 3 1 . I mmanue! Kant, Critique of Pure Reason, trans. Norman Kemp Smith ( London: St. Martin's Press, 1 929) , "Anticipations of Perception," pp. 20 1-8, A I 66/B207-AI 76/B2 1 8. 4 Sartre, in his analysis of Flaubert, showed the importance of the episode of the fall, from the point of view of a "hysterical engagement," but he gives it far too negative a meaning, even though he recognizes that the fall fits into a long-term, active, and positive project. Jean-Paul Sartre, The Family Idiot: Gustave Flaubert, 1821-1857, trans. Carol Cosman ( Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1 98 1 ) . 5 Writing of Rembrandt's Night Watch, Claude! spoke of the "disintegration brought to a group by light." Paul Claudel, uvres en prose (Paris: Pleiade, 1 965) , p. 1 429. Chapter 11 : The Painting bifore Painting D. H. Lawrence, "Introduction to These Paintings" (see Chapter 6, note 2 ) , in pp. 569, 576, 577 , 579-80. 1 82 4 6 8 9 Notes D. H. Lawrence, Lady Chatterlefs Lover (l\'ew York: Grove Press, 1 959) , p. 346. Interviews, p. 37 . (And Bacon's condemnation of all his paintings that still contain a figurative violence. ) Interviews, pp. 3 Off. Interviews, p. 56-7. I n his Francis Bacon (see Chapter 5, note 5 ) , john Russell has analyzed Bacon's attitude toward the photograph in his chapter entitled "The Prehensile Image," pp. 54-7 l . Foucault, writing on Gerard Fromanger, has analyzed several types of relation between photography and painting; see Michel Foucault, "Photogenic Painting," in Sarah Wilson, ed., Photogenic Painting: Gilles Deleuze, Michel Foucault, Gerard Fromanger (London: Black Dog, 1 999) , pp. 8 1104. The most interesting cases, like Fromanger, are those where the painter integrates the photograph, or the photograph's action, apart from any aesthetic value. Interviews, p. 1 3 . The theme of marks by chance, or by accident, appears constantly in the interviews, especially on pp. 50-67. See Puis Servien, notably Hasard et probabilite (Paris: Presses Universitaires de France, 1 949 ) . In the framework of his distinction between a "language of the sciences" and a "lyrical language," the author opposed probability as the object of science, and chance as the mode of a choice that was neither scientific nor aesthetic (to choose a flower by chance, that is, a flower that is neither "specified" nor "the most beautiful" ) . 1 0 Interviews, pp. 50--3. (Clearly Bacon does not make roulette a type of action: see his considerations of Nicolas de Stael and Russian roulette, pp. 1 22-4) . I I Interviews, p. 92. 1 2 Bacon notes that his best friends contest what he calls "chance" or " accident": see Interviews pp. 95-9. 13 Interviews, p. 100: "I know what I want to do, but I don't know how to do it" (and p. 12 : "I don't know how the form can be made . . . " ) . 14 Interviews, p. 1 26: "When we've talked about the possibility of making appearance out of something which was not illustration, I 've over-talked about it. Because, in spite of theoretically longing for the image to be made up of irrational marks, inevitably illustration has to come into it to make certain parts of the head 183 Notes and face which, if one left them out, one would then only be making an abstract design." 1 5 Interviews, pp. 1 05-7. 2 3 Chapter 12: The Diagram TN. " Traits et taches." The Robert dictionary defines tache most generally as "a small space of different color in a field of uniform color," and the English language presents a rich variety of possible equivalents, such as spot, blot, stain, patch, mark, blotch, splotch, smudge, dab, daub, and so on. The term tachisme was coined to refer to "pointillists" such as Seurat, who used juxtaposed dabs or touches of uniform color to produce their figurative works, and later, to the nonfigurative works of abstract expressionism or art iriformel. Deleuze introduces the term here in order to distinguish between two different conceptions of painting: the optical ( the visual perception of line and color by the eye) and the manual ( the application of traits and patches of color by the hand) . I have rendered the term as "patch" or "color-patch." For the translation of the term trait, see Chapter I , note 6. TN. See Interviews, pp. 201 . Here is the very important text from the interviews: Bacon: "Very often the involuntary marks are much more deeply suggestive than others, and those are the moments when you feel that anything can happen." Sylvester: "You feel it while you're making those marks?" Bacon: "No, the marks are made, and you survey the thing like you would a sort of graph [diagramme] . And you see within this graph the possibilities of all types of fact being planted. This is a difficul t thing; I'm expressing it badly. But you see, for instance, if you think of a portrait, you maybe have to put the mouth somewhere, but you suddenly see through this graph that the mouth could go right across the face. And in a way you would love to be able in a portrait to make a Sahara of the appearance to make it so like, yet seeming to have the distances of the Sahara" ( Interviews, p. 56) . In another passage, Bacon explains that when he does a portrait, he often looks at photographs that have nothing to do with the model for example, a photograph of a rhinoceros for the texture of the skin ( Interviews, p. 32) . 1 84 Notes 4 Interviews, pp. 90-2. 5 Interviews, pp. 89-90, on the possibility that involuntary marks contribute nothing and botch the painting, leading to a "kind of marshland." Interviews, p. 56: "You see within this graph [diagramme] the possibilities of all types of fact being planted ." Wittgenstein invoked a diagrammatic form in order to express "possibilities of fact" in logic. Interviews, p. 56. 8 Henri Maldiney has compared Cezanne and Klee on this point in Regard parole espace (see Chapter 6, note I ) , pp. 1491 5 1 . <) TN. See Auguste Herbin, Herbin: The Plastic Alphabet [exhibition catalogue] (New York: Galerie Denise Renee, 1 973) . 1 0 This tendency to eliminate the manual has always been present in painting, as when one says of a work, "I no longer feel the hand in it . . . " Henri Focillon analyses this tendency, "ascetic frugality," which culminates in abstract painting, in " I n Praise of Hands," in The Life of Forms in Art, trans. Charles B. Hogan and George Kubler (New York: Zone Books, 1 989) , pp. 1 73-4. But, as Focillon says, the hand is fel t all the same. In order to distinguish a true Mondrian from a false one, Georg Schmidt refers to the intersection of the two black sides of a square, or the disposition of the layers of color along right angles. See his Mondrian (Paris: Reunion des musees nationaux, n.d . ) , p . 1 48. I I See Elie Faure's famous text on Velasquez, in History of Art, vol. 4, Modern Art, trans. by Walter Pach (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1 924) , pp. 1 24-6. 1 2 TN. In English in the original, referring to Pollock's "all-over" drip paintings of 1 94750. 1 3 On these new blind spaces, see Christian Bonnefoi's analysis of Robert Ryman, "A propos de la destruction de l'entite de surface," in Macula 3--4 ( 1 978) , pp. 1 63-6; and Yves-Alain Bois's analysis of Christian Bonnefoi, "Le Futur anterieur," in Macula 5 -6 ( 1 979) , pp. 22933. 1 4 Clement Greenberg (Art and Culture [Boston: Beacon Press, 1 9 6 1 1 ) and Michael Fried ("Three American Painters: Kenneth Noland, Jules Olitski, Frank Stella" [ 1 965 ] , in Art and Objecthood: Essays and Reviews [Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1 9981) were the first 1 85 Notes to analyze the spaces of Jackson Pollock, Morris Louis, Barnett Newman, Kenneth Noland, etc., and to define them by a "strict opticality." The aim of these critics was doubtless to break with the extra-aesthetic criteria invoked by Harold Rosenberg when he coined the term "action painting." They reminded us that Pollock's works, no matter how "modern" they might be, were paintings first and foremost, and therefore subject to formal criteria. But the question is whether or not opticality is the best criteria for these works. It seems that Fried had some doubts that he passed over far too rapidly (see pp. 227-8, 232 ) , and that the term "action painting" might turn out to be aesthetically justified. 1 5 Greenberg strongly emphasized the importance of this abandon- ment of the easel, especially in Pollock. He raises the theme of the "gothic" in this context, but without seeming to give this term the full meaning it assumes in Worringer's analyses (one of Pollock's painting� is called, precisely, "Gothic" ) . Greenberg seems not to see any alternative other than "easel painting" or "mural painting" (which seems to us instead to correspond to Mondrian's case ) . See Macula 2 ( \ 977 ) , "Dossier Jackson Pollock." 1 6 Bacon often criticizes abstraction for remaining "on one level," and for botching the "tension" (Interviews, pp. 59--60) . And Bacon will say, when speaking of Duchamp, that he admires him more for his attitude than for his painting; to Bacon, Duchamp's painting seems to be a symbolism or a "shorthand of figuration" (Interviews, p. 1 05 ) . 1 7 Interviews, p. 94: "I hate that kind o f sloppy sort o f Central European painting. I ts one of the reasons I really don't like abstract expressionism." And p. 6 1 : "Michaux is a very, very intelligent and conscious man . . . and I think that he has made the best tachiste or free marks that have been made. I think he is much better in that way, in making free marks, than Jackson Pollock." 18 See Gregory Bateson, "Why Do Things Have Outlines?" in Steps toward an Ecology of Mind ( New York: Ballantine Books, 1 972) , pp. 27-32. What drove Blake mad, mad with rage and wrath, were people who took him for a madman, but it was also "some artists who painted pictures as though things didn' t have outlines. He called them the 'slobbering school" (p. 28) . 1 9 Interviews, p . 94: "You would never end a painting by suddenly throwing something at it. Or would you?" - "Oh yes. In that 1 86 Notes recent triptych, on the shoulder of the figure being sick into the basin, there's like a whip of white paint that goes like that. Well, I did that at the very last moment, and I just left it ." Chapter 13: Analogy See Joachim Gasquet's famous text in Conversations with Cezanne, ed. M ichel Doran, trans. Julie Lawrence Cochran (Berkeley: U ni- versity of California Press, 200 1 ) , pp. 1 14 -1 5 . The editor's reservations about the value of Gasquet's texts appear to me to be unfounded; Maldiney seems to be justified in using this text as the center of his commentary on Cezanne. The two criticisms leveled against the impressionists by Cezanne are, in general, to have remained at a confused state of sensation through their treatment of color, and, for the best of them, like Monet, to have remained in an ephemeral state: " I wanted to make impressionism something solid and enduring like the art of museums . . . . In these paintings of Monet, a solidity, a framework in the present, has to be put in the flight of the whole . . . . " The solidity or endurance that Cezanne calls for must at the same time agree with the pictorial material, the structure of the painting, the treatment of colors, and the state of clarity to which the sensation is led. For example, a viewpoint does not create a motif because it lacks the necessary solidity and duration (" I have here beautiful viewpoints, but that does not at al l make a motif hair if necessary"; Paul Cezanne, Correspondence, ed. John Rewald [Paris: Grasset, 1 978] , p. 2 1 1 ) . One finds in Bacon the same demand for clarity and endurance, which he himself opposes not to impressionism but to abstract expressionism. And he attaches this "possibility of endur- ing" first of all to the material: "think of the Sphinx made of bubble gum . . . " (Interviews, p. 58) . Significantly, Bacon thinks that oil painting is a medium of both long duration and a high clarity. But the possibility of enduring also depends on the framework or armature, and on the particular treatment of colors. See Doran, cd . , Conversations with Cezanne, p. 1 78, which is the text where Maurice Denis cites Serusier, but precisely in order to oppose him to Cezanne. 1 87 + 5 8 9 Notes TN. Interviews, p. 1 05 . I n his theory of the sign, Peirce attaches great importance to the analogical function and to the notion of the diagram. Nonetheless, he reduces the diagram to a similitude of relations. See Charles S. Peirce, Ecrits sur Ie signe, ed . Gerard Deledalle (Paris: Seuil, 1978) ; Peirce on Signs: Writings on Semiotic by Charles Sanders Peirce, ed. James Hoopes (Chapel Hill and London: U niversity of North Carolina Press, 199 1 ) . We borrow the preceding analysis from Richard Pinhas, S),nthise analogique, synthese digitale ( unpublished ) . [TN. A revised portion of this text has since appeared in Richard Pinhas, Les Larmes de Nietzsche (Paris: Flammarion, 200 I ) ] . Gregory Bateson has a very interesting hypothesis o n the language of dolphins in Steps to an Ecology of Mind (New York: Ballantine, 1972) , pp. 372-4. After having distinguished analogical language, founded on relations, and digital or vocal language, founded on conventional signs, Bateson comes up against the problem of dolphins. Because of their adaptation to the sea, they have renounced the kinesic and facial signs that characterize the analogical language of other mammals; they nonetheless remained condemned to the analogical functions of this language, but found themselves in the situation of having to "vocalize" them, to codify them as such. This is something like the situation of the abstract painter. On all these points, see Doran, ed . , Conversations with Cezanne (and far color, see especially the text by R. P. Riviere and J . F. Schnerb, "Cezanne's Studio," pp. 84--90) . In a fine article, "Cezanne: The Logic of Organized Sensations" (in Conversations with Cizanne, pp. 1 80-2 1 2) , Lawrence Gowing has analyzed the modulation of colar that Cezanne himself presented as a law of harmony. This modulation can coexist with other uses of color, but in Cezanne it takes on a particular importance around 1 900. Although Gowing reduces it to a "conventional" code (p. 1 9 1 ) or a "metaphoric system" (p. 1 92 ) , it is much more like a law of analogy. Chevreul used the term "harmonies of analogues." Clement Greenberg's French translator, Marc Chene tier, suggests that "shallow depth" be translated as profondeur maigre, an oceanographic expression that describes shallows or shoals [hauts- fonds] (Macula 2, p. 50) . 1 88 Notes 10 This would be a second point common to both Bacon and abstract expressionism. But Gowing notes that, already in Cezanne, colored patches "imply not only volumes but axes, armatures at right angles to the chromatic progressions," an entire "upright scaffold- ing" which, it is true, remains virtual. See Gowing, "Cezanne: The Logic of Organized Sensations," p . 204. Chapter 14: Every Painter Recapitulates the History oj Painting 4 in His or Her Own Way . . . Cited in Russell, Francis Bacon (see Chapter 5, note 5 ) , p. 99. See Alols Riegl, Late Roman Art Industry, trans. Rolf Winkes (2nd edn. ; Rome: Giorgio Bretschneider Editore, 1 985) . "Haptic," from the Greek verb apia ( to touch) , does not designate an extrinsic relation of the eye to the sense of touch, but a "possibility of seeing [regard]," a type of vision distinct from the optical: Egyptian art has not yet made up i ts mind with regard to the gaze, which it thinks must see things from close-up. As Maldiney says, "in the spatial zone of closeness, the sense of sight behaves just like the sense of touch, experiencing the presence of the form and the ground at the same place" (Regard parole espace I see Chapter 6, note 1 ] , p. 1 95 ) . Interviews, pp. 83, 1 14. Paul Claudel, The Eye Listens (Port Washington, N.Y.: Kennikat Press, 1 969) , p. 47; and p. 42: "Before a picture of Rembrandt's one never has the sensation of permanence and definiteness; i t is a precarious realization, a phenomenon, a miraculous beginning again of what has already expired : the curtain, raised for an instant, is ready to fall again." John Russell, in his Francis Bacon, cites a text by Michel Leiris that struck Bacon very much: "For Baudelaire, beauty cannot come into being without the intervention of something accidentaL . . . We can call 'beautiful' only that which suggests the existence of an ideal order �. supraterrestrial, harmonious, and logical and yet bears within i tself, like the brand of an original sin, the drop of poison, the rogue element of incoherence, the grain of sand that will foul up the entire system" ( p. 88) . On organic representation, see \Vilhelm Worringer, Form in Gothic (see Chapter 7, note 2 ) , chapter 5, "Classical Man." I n Abstraction and Empathy: A Contribution to the Psychology of Sfyle, trans. Michael 1 89 6 8 9 Notes Bullock ( London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1 963) , p. 28, Worringer writes, "This will did not consist in the wish to copy the things of the outer world or to render their appearance. Its aim was to project the lines and forms of the organically vital, the euphony of the its rhythm and its whole inward being, outward in ideal independence and perfection . . . . " Maldiney, Regard parole espace, pp. 1 9 7-8 (and further on Maldiney analyzes Byzantine art in detail as inventing a purely optical space, thereby breaking with Greek space) . I t is Wiilfllin , in particular, who has analyzed this aspect of tactile- optical space, or of the "Classic" world of the sixteenth century: light and shadows, and colors, can have a very complex play but they nonetheless remain subordinate to the plastic form that maintains its integrity. We must wait for the seventeenth century to witness the liberation of shadow and light in a purely optical space. See Heinrich Wiilfllin, Principles of Art History (see Chapter 5, note 6 ) , especially chapters I and 5. A particularly striking example is given in the comparison of the two church interiors of Neefs the Elder and E. de Witte (p. 2 1 3) . Wiilfllin, Principles of Art History, p . 2 1 ( translation modified) . Worringer, Abstraction and Empathy, pp. 1 1 21 5 (it is Worringer who invented the word "expressionism," as Dora Vallier shows in her preface to the French translation of this work ) . And in Form in Gothic, Worringer insists on the two movements which are opposed to classical organic symmetry: the infinite movement of the inorganic line, and the peripheral and violent movement of the wheel or turbine (pp. 55-7 ) . 1 0 Paul Claudel, The Eye Listens, p. 36. I I See Giorgio Vasari, "Life of Michelangelo Buonarroti," in Lives of the Artists, trans. George Bull (London: Penguin Books, 1 965 ) , vo!' I , pp. 325-442. 1 2 Defining the pure optical space of Rembrandt, Wiilfllin shows the importance of the straight stroke and the broken line that replace the curve; and with the portraitists, the expression no longer comes from the contour, but from strokes dispersed inside the form (Principles of Art History, pp. 23, 32-4) . But all this leads Wiilfllin to state that optical space does not break with the tactile connections of form and contour without liberating new tactile values, notably 1 90 Notes weight (" the more the attention is withdrawn from the plastic form as such, the more active is the interest in the surface of things, in how objects feel. Flesh in Rembrandt is clearly rendered as a soft material, yielding to pressure . . . " [pp. 33-4] ) . 1 3 TN. W6lfllin, Principles if Art Histo�y, p. 1 9 ( translation modified) . 1 4 The warm o r cool tonality of a color i s essentially relative (which does not mean subjective) . I t depends on its surroundings, and a color can always be "heated" or "cooled." And green and red are in themselves neither warm nor cool: green is the ideal point of the mixture of warm yellow and cool blue, and red, on the contrary, is that which is neither blue nor yellow, so that warm and cool tones can be represented as separating from each other starting from green, and then tending to be gathered together in red through an "ascending intensification." See Johann Wolfgang von Goethe, Goethe's Color Theor], ed. Rupprecht Matthaei, trans. Herb Aach (New York: Von Nostrand Reinhold, 1 970) , p. 1 68, §§ 764-802. 1 0 On the relations of tonality in Byzantine art, see Andre Grabar, By.antine Painting: A Historical and Critical Stud], trans Stuart Gilbert (Geneva: Skira, 1 953) , and Maldiney, Parole, regard, espace, pp. 241-6. lfi Lawrence Gowing, in "Cezanne: The Logic of Organized Sensations" (in Conversations with Cezanne, ed. Michel Doran, trans. Julie Lawrence Cochran [Berkeley: University of California Press, 200 1 ] , pp. 1 80-2 1 2) , analyses numerous examples of these colored sequences (pp. 1 9 1--20 1 ) . But he also shows how this system of modulation could coexist with other systems in relation to a single motif: for example, in Seated Peasant, the watercolor version works through sequence and gradation (blue-yellow-rose) , whereas the oil version works through light and local tone; or the two portraits of a woman wearing a jacket, one of which "is massively modeled in light and dark" (p. 20 I ) , while the other, though it still maintains chiaroscuros, renders the volumes through the sequence rose-yellow-emerald-cobalt blue. See pp. 1 9 1 and 2001 , with rep rod uctions. 17 R. P. Riviere and J . F. Schnerb, in Doran, eds, Conversations with Cezanne, (see Chapter 1 3, note I ) p. 87 (and p. 88: "a succession of colors progressing from warm to cool," "a scale of very high tones" ) . If we return to Byzantine art, the fact that it combines a 1 9 1 Notes modulation of colors with a rhythm of values implies that its space is not uniquely optical; despite Riegl, "colorism" seems to us to be irreducibly haptic. 1 8 Black and white, light and dark, present a movement of contraction or expansion analogous to the warm and the cool. But even Kandinsky, in the passages where he oscillates between a primacy of tones or values, recognizes in the light-dark values only a static and "stationary" movement. See Wassily Kandinsky, Concerning the Spiritual in Art, trans. M . T. H. Sadler (New York: Dover Publications, 1 977 ) , pp. 36-9. 19 TN. Interviews, p. 1 20. 2 0 I t was Buffon who, in relation to problems concerning the reproduction of living beings, proposed the notion of the internal mold, while emphasizing the paradoxical character of this notion, because the mold is here supposed to "penetrate the mass." See Comte de Georges-Louis Leclerc Buffon, Histoire naturelle des animaux in uvres completes (Paris, 1 885) , vol. 3, p. 450. And in Buffon himself, this internal mold is related to the Newtonian conception of light. On the technical difference between molding and modulation, one can refer to the recent analyses of Simondon: in modulation "there is never time to turn something out, to remove i t from the mold [demoulage], because the circulation of the support of energy is equivalent to a permanent turning out; a modulator is a continuous, temporal mold . . . . To mold is to modulate in a definitive manner, to modulate is to mold in a continuous and perpetually variable manner." Gilbert Simondon, L'Individu et sa genese physico-biologique (Paris: Presses Universitaire de France, 1 964) , pp. 4 1 --42. Chapter 15: Bacon's Path Interviews, p. 1 20. "Suffice i t to say that black and white are also colors, for in many cases they can be looked upon as colors . . . . " Vincent Van Gogh, Letter B6, to Emile Bernard (second half of June 1 888) , in The Complete Letters of Vincent Van Gogh, 3 vols . , trans. C. de Dood (London: Thames & Hudson, 1 958) , vol. 3, p. 490. "vVhen the complementary colors are produced in equal strength, 1 92 4 .Notes that is to say in the same degree of vividness and brightness. their juxtaposition will intensify them each to such a violent intensity that the human eye can hardly bear the sight of it." Van Gogh, Letter 40 1 , to Theo, in Complete Letters, vol. 2, p. 365. One of the principal interests of Van Gogh's correspondence is that Van Gogh turned color into a kind of initiatory experience, after a long trek through chiaroscuro, and black and white. See R. P. Riviere and J. F. Schnerb, "Cezanne's Studio," in Doran, ed. , Conversations with Cezanne, (see Chapter 1 3 , note I ) , p. 88: "Cezanne's entire working method is determined by this chromatic concept of modeling. . . . If he avoided blending two tones by a simple turn of the brush, it was because he saw modeling as a succession of colors progressing from warm to cool. His great interest lay in determining each of the colors exactly. He believed that to replace one of them with the mixture of two neighboring ones would not be art. . . . Modeling by color, which was his language, requires the use of a sophisticated array of colors that allows him to observe oppositions down to half�tones and to avoid white lights and black shadows." In the preceding letter to Theo (Letter 40 1 ) , Van Gogh introduces the principles of colorism, which he derives from Delacroix rather than the impressionists (he sees the opposite i n Delacroix, but also the analogous in Rembrandt: what Rembrandt is to light, Dclacroix is to color) . And next to pure tones, whieh are defined by primary and complementary colors, Van Gogh introduces broken tones: "If one mixes two complementary colors in unequal proportions, they only partially destroy each other, and one gets a broken tone, which will be a variety of gray. This being so, new contrasts may be born of the juxtaposition of two complementary colors, one of which is pure and the other, broken . . . . Finally, if two similar colors are placed next to each other, the one in the pure state, the other broken, for instance pure blue and gray-blue, another kind of contrast will result, which will be toned down by the analogy . . . . In order to intensify and to harmonize the effect of his colors he [Delacroix 1 used the contrast of the complementary and the concord of analogous colors at the same time; or in other terms, the repetition oj a vivid tint by the same broken tone." Van Gogh, Complete Letters, vol. 2, pp. 365-6. 193 8 9 Notes See Gowing's analysis in "Cezanne: The Logic of Organized Sensations" (see Chapter 1 4, note 1 6) , pp. 1 90-2. Georges Duthuit, Le Feu du signes (Geneva: Skira, 1 962) , p. 1 89: "In effect, painting tends to disengage itself from impressionism by putting the dispersion of the tints which are supposed to be reconstituted in our vision back into the large colored planes, which allow them to circulate more freely. Rather than being recomposed in our vision, the image, always new, creates itself: the form will be all the better by assuring its unforeseen vigor, and the line, its essential cleanness . . . . " Cezanne reproached Gauguin for having stolen from him his "small sensation," while misunderstanding the problem of the "passage of tones." In the same way, Van Gogh has often been reproached for the inertia of the background in certain of his canvases; see the very interesting text by Jean Paris, Miroirs de Rembrandt. Le Sommeil de Vermeer. Le Soleil de Van Gogh. Espaces de Ci:::.anne (Paris: Editions Galilee, 1 973) , pp. 1 35-6. Van Gogh, Letter 520, to Theo (in Complete Letters, vol. 3, p. 6) : "to finish [the painting] , I am now going to become an arbitrary colorist." Van Gogh, letter to Bernard, early August 1 988, in Complete Letters, vol. 3, p. 5 1 0 (and p. 6: "instead of painting the ordinary wall of the mean room, I paint the infinite, a plain background of the richest, intensest blue . . . " ) . And Gauguin, letter to Shuffenecker, 8 October 1 888: "1 have done a self-portrait for Vincent . . . . The color is a color remote from nature; imagine a confused collection of pottery all twisted by the furnace! All the reds and violets streaked by flames, like a furnace burning fiercely, the seat of the painter's mental struggles. The whole on a chrome background sprinkled with childish nosegays. The room of a pure young girl . . . . " Paul Gauguin, Letters to His Wife and Friends, ed. Maurice Malingue, trans. Henry J . Stenning (Cleveland : World Publishing Co., 1 949) . Gaugin's La Belle Angele ( 1 889) presents a formula that Bacon will also follow: the field, the head-Figure surrounded by a circle, and even attendant-object . . . . l O Van Gogh, letter to his Sister, 1 890 (in Complete LeUers, vol. 3, p. 470) : "What impassions me most much, much more than all the rest of my metier is the portrait, the modern portrait. 1 seek it in color . . . . " 1 94 Notes 1 1 Interviews, p. 1 1 2. 1 2 According to Huysmans's crItique, there are "scabby and dull colors" in Gauguin, especially at the beginning, that he did not know how to avoid. Bacon is thrown into the same problem in the malerisch period. As for the other danger, the inert ground, Bacon also confronts it; it is even the reason why he most often criticizes acrylics. Oil has its own life, whereas one knows in advance how acrylic paint is likely to behave. See Interviews, p. 93. 4 4 Chapter 16: Note on Color Marc Le Bot, "Espaces," in L'Arc 73 (special Issue on Francis Bacon) . TN. Title of a work by Olivier Messiaen incorporating eighteen bird songs. In L'Espace et Ie regard ( Paris: Editions du Seuil, 1 965) , Jean Paris makes an interesting analysis of the halo from the viewpoints of space, light, and color. He also studies arrows as spatial vectors, in the case of St. Sebastian, St . U rsula, and so on. I n Bacon, the purely indicative arrows seem to be the last residues of these saintly arrows, just as the gyratory circles for the coupled Figures are residues of halos. Michael Fried, "Three American Painters" (see Chapter 1 2 , note 1 4) , p. 245. Russell, Francis Bacon (see Chapter 5, note 5), p. 1 2 1 . Chapter 17: The Eye and the Hand TN. Henri FociIlon, "In Praise of Hands" (see Chapter 1 2 , note 10 ) , pp. 1 57-84. The word hap tisch was coined by Riegl in response to certain criticisms. It did not appear in the first edition of Spiitriimische Kunstindustrie ( 1 90 1 ) , which was content with the word taktische. TN. See Interviews, p. 1 26. Interviews, pp. 1 1l3 . Interviews, p. 1 1 . Bacon adds, "And then I made these things, I gradually made them. So that I don't think the bird suggested the umbrella; i t suddenly suggested this whole image" (p. 1 1 ) . This text seems obscure, since Bacon invokes two contradictory ideas at 1 9 5 6 Notes the same time: a gradual series and a sudden whole. But both are true. I n any case, he means that there is not a relationship between one form and another (bird-umbrella), but a relationship between an intention at the beginning, and an entire series or ensemble at the end. TN. In English in the original. The reference is to the song "Crosseyed and Painless," by David Byrne, Chris Frantz, Jerry Harrison, Tine Weymouth, and Brian Eno, from the Talking Heads album Remain in Light, produced by Brian Eno (Sire Records, 1 980) . I thank Timothy M urphy for this reference. The mixture of complementary colors produces gray; but the "broken" tone, the unequal mixture, conserves the sensible heterogeneity or the tension of colors. The painting of the face will be both red and green, etc. Gray as a power [puissance] of broken color is very different from gray as the product of black and white. I t is a haptic, and not optical, gray. Of course, the color could be broken with the optical gray, but much less so, even with a complementary: in effect, we are already given what is in question, and we lose the heterogeneity of the tension, or the millimetric precision of the mixture. Interviews, p. 56. Interviews, p. 1 2 : "The next day I tried to take it further and tried to make it more poignant, more near, and I lost the image completely." See also pp. 90, 94. 1 0 Interviews, pp. 56, 58, 1 00 ("these marks that have happened on the canvas evolved into these particular forms") . I I See Interviews, p. 56: the diagram is only a "possibility of fact." A logic of painting here meets up with notions analogous to those of Wittgenstein. 12 This was Bacon's formula; see Interviews, p. 1 2 . 13 I n a short text on Michelangelo, Luciano Bellosi has shown how Michelangelo destroyed the narrative religious fact in favor of a properly pictorial or sculptural fact. See Michelangelo: The Painter, trans. Pearl Sanders (New York: Grosset & Dunlap, 1 9 7 1 ) . 1 96 Index For references to specific paintings see the Index of Paintings. abjection 1 5, 5 1 ; becomes splendor 52; in photography 90; and the smile 28 abstract expressionism xvii, 1 04 6; action painting 1 1 0; Bacon critiques as a Hmess" 1 09; current evolution of 1 06; origin of term "expressionism" 190 ll. 9; Greenberg's interpretation of 1 0 7, 1 85 n. 1 4, 1 86 n. 15; and shallow depth 1 1 9. See at.\o arl informel abstraction abstract art xvii, 36, 59, 67, 1 1 0; in Bacon 31; and th(' brain 34; and chaos 103 4; produn"s its own diehes 89; creates a code 104, 1 1 7; vcrsus the figurative 2, I I ; in Gothic art 1 30; as a means of surpassing figuration 34; as a pictorial n'rebrality 53 accident 46, 98, 1 34; in Christian painting 1 24; and the diagram 1 57; in Egyptian art 123; and frcc marks 94; laws of 1 256; as the "manifestation" of an essence 1 25; and resemblance; utilized 96 active rhythm xviii, 74 8.1; and the fall 80 2; retrogradation of passive rhythm 7;'; and sleeping figures 77 aesthetics: and the diui{'al 5 1 , 54: in H('�d 1 7B n. 1 affect versus feeling 39 afterward 49, 50, 98, 1 06. See alw beforehand kvsteresis ambivalence of feeling 39; and psychoanalysis 39; and sensation 39 analogy 9 1 , 1 1 1 2 1 ; "aesthetic" 1 1 6; and color 1 20; and figuration 1 1 .1, 1 5 7 ; by isomorphism 1 1 4 1 5; as modulation 1 1 7 1 8 ; not defInable by a clear-cut theory 1 1 4; and presence 1 1 4; of resemblance 1 57; two forms of 1 1 5 Andre, Carl, planar sculptures of 106 animal(s) 46, 66, 1 1 3; bat 20; bird(s) 42, 1 1 3 14; buffalo 20; calves 25; dead xiv; dog 20 I, 24, 26; and faciali ty 2 1 ; and man 2 1 , 24; pig 1 9 20; postures of 1 1 4; and spirit 20 Anzicu, Didier 1 78 n. 1 4 apple 55; body (If 35; i n Ci:zanne 8 7 , 90 armature Xl\" 6, 1 1 9, 14\ 1 48; as structure 30 art in/arme! 104 6, 1 1 7 . S" also abstract expressionism art 2.'>, 69; classical 46; Gothic 46; Japanese 1 4 1 ; northern 46; primitive 1 41 . See also painting history of Artaud, Antonin 39, 1 7 9 n. 1 , 1 7 1 n. 6; and body without organs 44; and presence ::'4; rdation to Baron 45; and scream-breaths 1 1 3 arts: their autonomy ,1)6; their clinical essence 54; their possible hierarchy 56 athleticism 12 19, 23, 33; aflective 45; derisory athletics 1 5, 1 7; of the Figure 1 4 attendant rhythm 7 4 85; has a constant value 75, 80; flattening as 76; oval as 79; its circulation throughout the painting 82; as nonrctrogradable 75. See also rhythm aucnrlant(s) xviii, 2 1 , 50, 70; as assessing a variation 1 :1; as a l'onstant 7 1 ; "half- <tt'rial" 73; explirit types 74; not 1 9 7 Index spectators 1 3 ; in the triptychs 1 3; visible versus rhythmic 7 7 automatic writing 1 2 7 background xvi: i n Byzantine a r t 1 27; tonal 29. See also foreground ground Bacon, Francis: critique of abstraction 1 08; and Beckett 40, 49; relation to Artaud 45; relation to Cezanne 35 36, 59, 1 1 9; as decorator 47, 1 52; as detective 63: on Duchamp 95; and Egyptian art 1 22, 1 23 4, 1 35; critique of expressionism 1 08 -9; and Michelangelo 1 6 1 ; and the history of painting I 351f.; destroys paintings 189*90; and Velasquez 53 4; "record the !act" 35; "style" in 50; his "system" 6 7, 30, 32; three periods of his work 27 33. See also techniques Bacon's Bailly, Jean-Christoph 1 76 n. 5, 1 79 n. 1 6 barbarian art ,5'ee Gothic art Barre, Martin, laminated works 1 06 bas-relief in Egyptian art 1 22 Bateson, Gregory, on language of dolphins 1 88 n. 7; on outlines 1 86 n. 1 8 Bazin, Andre 1 7 5 n . 9 Beckett, Samuel 14 , 1 73 n. 2, 1 76 n. I , 1 79 n. 7; and attendants 7 1 ; The Lost Ones xiv, 14; and Bacon 40, 49; and immobility 4 1 ; and life 62; and presence 54 becoming 35; becoming-animal 27, 32, 59; becoming-imperceptible 27; reality of 25 Beetboven, Ludwig van 73 beforehand 50, 98, 106. See also afterward hysteresis Bellosi, Luciano, on Micbelangelo 1 96 n . 1 3 Berg, Alban, and t h e scream 60 Blake, William 25, 1 7 7 n. 6, 186 n. 1 8; and outlines 1 1 0 blurriness xv) 5, 29; in the system 30; two kinds in Bacon 67 body: and athleticism 23; and catastrophe 1 1 8; confinement of 1 4; defi)rmation of 59; effort of 1 5; escapes from itself xv, 1 5 , 27, 50; and lorces 4 1 ; hysterical reality of 48; immobile xiv; intensive reality of 45-6; lived body of phenomenology 44; as the material of the Figure 20, 55; as meat 22; and mirror 1 8 ; and movement 15; and music 54; as nonorg-anic 45; exceeds the organism l I B; as plexus xiv, 1 5; and power 44; and presence 52, 55; sonorous 54; and spirit 47; in Gothic art 1 29 body without organs; and alcohol 47; approaches to 47; and autoscopia 49; defined by thresholds or levels not organs 45; defined in terms of a wave 47; discovered by Artaud 44; and drugs 47; as an egg 45; as flesh and nerve 45; and hysteria 47; and sadomasochism 47; and schizophrenia 47; "scen" beneath of organism 49; and time 48 Bois, Yves-Alain, on Christian Bonneroi 1 85 n. 1 3 bones 22; and flesh xiv; flesh descends from 8 1 ; as trapeze apparatus 23 Bonnefoi, Christian, strata in 1 06; 1 85 ll. 1 3 brain 36; and nervous system 36; right versus left hemispheres 1 1 3 Braque, Georges, 1 1 9 breath: and the head 20; painting as 52; and the scream 45; vital 20 hroken tone(s) xvi, 1 40, 145* 6; and the Figure 14950; in Van Gogh 193 n. 4 Buffon, Georges-Louis Leclerc; on internal molding 1 92 n. 20 hullfight(s) 1 3 , 2 1 2, 42; rejected by Bacon as too drama tic 90 Burroughs, William S., l>faked Lunch 1 7, 47, 1 76 n. 3, 1 79 n. 3. Byzantine art 6, 1 27-9, 1 4 1 , 1 9 1 n. 1 7 ; "apparition" versus accident 1 28; disintegration in 1 28-9; and mosaic 1 32 canvas 5, 106; border of 85, 108; and cliches 10 I I , 86; and the easel 1 06 7; and frame 85, 108; getting out 01; 96; its givens 87; planarity of 107; in Pollock 1 06; determined by probabili ties 93 Carroll, Lewis 1 77 n, 3; usc of mirror 1 8; and the smile 28 catastrophe 1 0 1 ; in Cezanne 102; destroys figurative and probabilistic 1 98 Index givens 100; and diagram IOZ, 106; introduced into Egyptian art 13:; . .1'1'( also ,*haos diagram. Cezanne, Paul 1 87 n. I , 1 88 n. 8, 189 n. 1 0, 1 9 1 n . 1 6, 191 n. 1 7, 1 94 n. 7; on abstraction 1 1 3; the "abyss" 1 02, 1 04; critiques of 1 8 7 n. 2; compared with Bacon xv, 59, 1 1 9; and chaos/ catastrophe 1 02, I I I ; fight against cliches 87; his modulated use of color I I B* * 1 9 , 1 32 3, 140, 1 93 n. 4; rriticisms of 1 42; painting forces .'i7 ; and coupled Figures 70; critique of Gauguin 1 4 1 ; and geology I l l ; analogical use of geometry 1 1 3; versus Impressionism 35; D. H. Lawn'ncc on 87 9; logic of the senses 42; Maldiney on 1 79 n . 1 7, 185 n. 8; his "middle way" I I I , 1 1 7 1 8; on sensation 34 5, 1 00; and rhythm 43 chance: in Bacon 93 4, 1 1 0; and Bacon's cleaning lady 95; mntrasted with probability 94; manipulated 94 6; "nonscientific and not yet af"sthf'tic" 94; two types: prepinorial and pictorial 93 4. See also probability chaos 1 0 1 ; and diagram 102; as germ of rhythm 44, 1 02; in Klee 1 02; non figurative 1 03 Chcnctier, Marc 1 88 n. 9 chiaroscuro 4, 1 1 8 , 1 20, 1 32 4; its "homely atmosphere" 1 3 7 choice random versus binary 104 Christ, in El Greco 9; in Christian painting 124 5 Christian art 1 24 5; its atheism 1 24. See also painting history of clarity: and hlurriness 6; in colorism 1 40; defined {or colorism 1 39; two modes of in eolorism 1 42; of sensation 1 1 2 classical representation 103 4, 1 07, 1 28; and figuration 46; in Greek art 1 25; and Vehlsqucz :;3. See alln representation Claudcl 73, 1 24 5, 1 82 n. 1 0, 189 n. 4, 1 90 n. 10; on light 1 28; on trowel painting 1 3 1 cliche 1 0 I I , 39; and abstract painting 89; deformation versus mauling 87) 89 90, 9 1 , 10 I; destroyed by fret' marks 94; fight against 86 98, I I I ; in the painter's hrad 97; and prohahility 96; and sensation �:H; transi()rmatioll of 9 1 ; as vinual images 86 clinamen and the bll 82 clinic 5 1 ; aesthetic 54 close vision 1 22 3, 1 33, 1 35, 1 5 7, 1 74 n. 1 7 ; in Egyptian art 1 22 code 9 1 , 1 1 4; in ahstract art 104, 1 1 7; and convention 9 1 , 1 1 4; as digital not analogical 1 1 2 1 3 ; optical 1 29; religious 1 0; its srramblin� I l l ; units of 1 1 4 color 27; and law of analogy 1 20; and catastrophe 1 1 8; coloring sensation xii) 1 1 2; complementary xvii, 140 I ; as a definition of painting 1 54; and the diagram 1 38; and three dements of painting 1 44 5; its gcsturality 107; Goethe and "'ewton on 1 33, 1 39, 1 9 1 n. 1 4; i n Impressionism 3 5 , 58; and light xviii , 84, 1 33; and line xiii, 52; of meat 22; and modulation xvi; as a direct action on nervous system 52; and optical space 1 3 1 * 2; relations of value versus rclations of tonality 1 1 8, 1 20, 1 32, 1 39; and thickness 4; and sound 55, 60; and the spectrum 1 32; structure versus force 1 50; tactilc- optical function of 1 5 1 ; theory of 1 3 1 4 wlorism 1 20, 1 34, 1 39; Bacon as colorist xv, 1 42; and clarity 142; and the haptic 1 40; as modulation 1 52; rules of 1 39 40; and vividness 140 <"Olor-patch(s) lachel,) 99, 1 1 0, 1 58; in expressionism 1 05; and the diagram 1 0 1 ('omposition contrasting 3 7 ; versus organization 1 28 9 Conrad) Joseph, }I/igger of the " .Narcissus" 15 1 6, 1 76 11. 2 ('ontour 6, 1 55; as apparatus 1 5; as deformer 33; as depopulator 32; drawn 1 20; in Egyptian art 123; fi.mrtion of 1 7; in Gothic art 1 30; as isolator 32; as membrane 1 2, 33, 1 20; modality of color in 1 5 1 2; organic versus geometric 1 26; as pedestal 40; as place 1 2; puddle as 30; "save the contour" 1 1 0; shape versus color 1 2; vanishing point of 1 7; and vibration 73 contraction 18, 32, 58; and extension 7B; of the Hesh 40; technique of 30 1 99 Index coupling 63, of Figures 65 73, 83; of sensation 69: and isolation 2 1 2 cruciiixion(s} xiii, 38; and butcher shops 24 :i; and descent 23; and dogs 26; and meat 24, 26; rejected by Bacon 90; series of 36 cubism xiv, xvii curtain 53, 1 1 0; Bacon's use of in pope paintings 29 death of calves 25; and lile 62; and the scream 62 decoration: Bacon as decorator 47, 1 52; and Gothic line 46; vital 46 deformation IB, 83; of bodies 2 1 , 1 1 9; of cliches 87; in EI Grero 9; in place 97; and sensation 36; as static 1 9 ; versus transl()rmation 36, 59, 9 1 -2, l OS; Degas, Edgar, spinal column in 22 Delacroix, Eugene, as colorist 1 9 3 n. 4 depopulator xiv, 1 4, SO; ron tour as 32 depth 108, 1 55; between field and Figure 5; and form 29; in R('naissanc(' painting 58; shallow xvi-xvii, 1 1 9, 1 36, 143, 1 46 7 descent; and flesh 40; dCS<'cnt-llow 78 diagram 63, 99 1 1 0; analogical not digital 1 1 3; in Bacon 1 1 0, 1 38, 1 84 n. 2; how to botch it 1 0 1 , 1 59; as cbaos( catastrophe 1 02, 106; of couplrd Figures 73; definition of 1 0 1 , 1 02; dillerentiated by painter 1 02; or "graph" 100, 1 59; law of 1 56; in modern painting 1 03--6; acts as a modulator 1 20, 1 38; termed "motif' by Cezanne 1 1 2; use of the term in Peirce 1 1 6; not a psychological experience 102; scrambling ellect /.')8 9; and sensation 66, 100; "unlocks areas of sensation" 1 02; in tactile-optical space 1 56; tempered use of I l l ; as temporal I I I * 1 2 ; diagram; horizontal 76 diastole 33, 4 1 , 78, 1 79 n . 1 7. See also rhythm systole digital and ["Ode 104; as a use of geometry I 1 2; as a value of the hand 1 54 5 Duchamp, Marrel 40, 180 n. 1 , 1 86 n. 1 6; Bacon on 95; and chance 95 Duthuit, Georges, 1 40 I, 1 94 n. 6 Dyer, George 40I easel 1 54; abandonment of 106, 1 07* 8' and sleeping figures 85 Egyptian art 6, 122 3, IS5; and cubelorm 123; its modem lorm 1 34; and pyramid 1 23. See also painting history of Eisenstein, Sergei 9 1 essence; and accident 1 24; in Byzantine art 1 28; in Egyptian art 1 23; and the work of art 1 23 eternity 64, 1 43; of the work af ar! 1 23 Eumenides 2 1 event "created" b y newspapers 9 1 ; and place 1 5 ; and sensation 34 expressionism; see abstract expressionism eye 42, 5.'i; and hand 107, 1 54; in Egyptian art 1 22; haptic lunction 1 27, 140; optical function 1 27, 1 33; given a non-optical power 102; not a fixed organ 52; and painting 52 fac(' and animal traits 2 1 ; dismantling 20 I, 28; versus head 20 fac t 2, 66; and the body 1 30* I; common or unique 1 3, 2 1 , 84; of the Figure 1 2 , 84; o f man and animal 2 1 , 2 3 ; "matter of lart," 4, 65, 69, 70, 84; in Michelangelo 1 60; pictorial 1 0 1 , 1 34, 160; possibility of 1 0 1 , 1 1 2, 1 1 9, 1 2 1 , 1 60, 1 6 1 ; "record the fact" 35; sticking to 3; laith and figuration 9; vital 61 lall 1 4, 23, 62, 73; and active rhythm 80 * I, 82; of the body 1 1 9; in Christian painting 1 25; and dinamen 82; of flesh xiv; inttilSive not extensive 80 I; reality of 8 1 ; and tension 8 1 Faure, Elie 185 n . I I feeling ambivalence of 39; areas of 36; no feelings in Bacon 39; levels of 1 0; and spertators 39; strange 24 field (s) xiv; and Figure 1 46; as background 5; modality of color in 5, 32, 146 9; and Figure 5 6, 146; as monochromatic 48, 85, 1 43; movement around Figure 12, 83; operative 2; as spatializing structure 1 2 ; temporality of 85, 143 figural 2; in Lyotard 1 73 n. I ; opposed to figuration 34, 97 figuration xvii, 2 -3; and analogy 1 1 5; derived from image of white canvas 200 Index 86; Bacon's critique of 1 7 3 n. 2; all eflt'ct of classical representation 46, 1 26, 1 36; and diagram 1 2 1 ; and faith 9; contrasted with the fi?;ural 97, 1 73 n. I; and the Figure 8, 36; of horror 60; and hysteria 53; and optimism 43; in the painter's head 97; in past painting 8 1 1 ; primary versus secondary 37 8, 97; in Proust 67; and religion 81 1 ; and sensation 37; and tactile-optical space 1 55 6; unavoidable but secondary 6 1 , 8 7 Figurc(s) xi\'; a n d attendants 1 3 ; as hody 1 5 ; in Christian painting 1 0, 1 24; modali ty of mlor in 1 49 5 1 ; coupled 3 , 65-73; crouchinf( 38; emerges from diagram 73, 94 5, 1 1 0, 1 56; dissipation of xv, 27, 30 I ; exploration within the contour 4 1 ; as fal'! 1 2 ; and firld 5 6, 1 46; and figuration 8, 36, 97; as the form rda ted to sensa tion 34; in Gothic Art 46; gymnastics of 15; immobility of 2; as improbable 94, 98; and isolation 1 2; rnov('ment toward Ilcld 1 2 , 83; multi-sr-Ilsible *12; in Proust 67; as pure presence 97; rf'*lationships betwl'cn 3; and rhythm 7 1 , 82; seated 38, 59; as sky 3 1 : sleeping 22 3; and solitude 1 4; and time 48 Flauh('rt, Gustave 5 1 ; and hysteria 5 1 ; Sartre o n 1 82 n . 4 flesh: acrobatics of xiv, 23, 33, 4 1 ; in Bacon 142; descends from hones xiv, 22, 8 1 ; rolors of 23; '" a property of color 1 42; and Figure 1 50; as meat 22; and nervous system 34 flight liners) of 54, 1 02 3 Focillon, Henri 1 85 n. 10, 195 n. I; "In Praise of Hands" 1 54 forcds) 56 64; and body without organs 47 48: capturing 57; and color I SO I; coupling of 6 1 ; Figure as a pure fO[(T 3 1 ; of inertia xi\'; in\"isibk xiii, 4 1 , 53; making visible 56 64; in Michelangelo 160 I ; define movement 83: determines organs 48; painting forces 56 64; and the scream 6 1 ; as condition of sensation 56; and time 57 forcc(s) types of: attraetion 57; 20 1 deformatioll 63. H4: (,()lllpre�Sioll 2�): roll traction 1 8, 30, 32, *40, 58. 78: cosmos 27, 29, 5H; coupling !,ll1dod ici 2 1 2, 63, 65 73, 84; diabolical (Kafkal 6 1 ; dilation 1 8, :12 , -10, 5 8 ; dissipation 2 8 , 6 3 , 83 4; di" ision 84; elongation 29 -30, 58: f'x("frting 1 6 ; expansion 78; f1attl'lling I S, 58, 63, 76; folding 57; future 6 1 2; germinative .'i 7; gravitation 57; inertia 57; invisible xiii, 53; isolation 63, 84; mechanical 46; pressure 57 pressure 1 6, 578; of sleep xi\', 59, 69, 76 7, 79; sonorous 56; of sunflowcro.; 57; tempest 3 1 ; thermic 57; waiting 1 5 ; weight 42, 57; wind �n ; vapor; 3 1 ; vomiting xiv, 1 6, 59; jet of water X\', 3 1 forced movement : and rhythm 73. See alIo vibration resonance {()reground: primac)' of in Greek art 1 25. See aIm background ground form: and abstraction 1 03 4; in Baron's paintings 1 56; transfiguration in Byzantine art 1 28; dcformation in Christian painting 1 24; as contingent 45; emerges from the diagram 1 56; in Egyptian art 1 23; and figuration 36; and for(cs 56; and th(' formless 4, 5; and geometry 46; in Gothic Art 46, 1 30; and ground 4, 25; form-ground relationship destroycd 1 1 8; pure 2; and reprl'sentation 36; at fcst 59; transformation of 59 Foucault, !\firhel, on Fromangt'f 1 83 ll. 6 frame 85, 1 08; and geometry 1 1 2; and sensation 1 1 2 FratH'is, St. , in Giatto 1 0 Freud, Lucian 40, 78 Fried, Michael 1 52 , 1 85 n. 1 4, 195 n. 4; on tastc 1 53; Fromanger, Gerard Foucault, on 183 Il. 6 games chess vrrsus roulette 94; theory of 94; combinatorial "ersus throw-by- throw types 94 5 Gasquet, Joacbim 1 87 n. 1 Gauguin, Paul .15, 1 94 n. 7, 1 95 n. 1 2; and broken tones 142; loss of darity in 1 43; critiqued by Cezanne 1 4 1 ; and color x\'i; and perception 1 4 1 ; self�portrait 194 n . 9 Index geometry 1 1 1 1 3 ; in abstract art 103; analogical usc of 1 1 3 ; in Cezanne I I I ; and the "digital" 1 1 2 ; in Egyptian art 1 23; essential versus operative 46, 1 30; and the frame 1 1 2; and Gothic art 46; optical 104; and prohlems (ahlation adjunction projection intersection) 46; "stubborn" I I I ; vital 46 givens: figurative 87, 90, 100, 1 0 1 , I I I ; prepictorial 92, 95; probabilistic 93 4, 99; removed by the act of painting 1 00; visual 95 God, his existt'nce permits everything 1 0; in past painting 9 1 0; in Christian painting 124 Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von, color theory 1 33, 1 39, 1 9 1 n. 1 4 Golea, Antoine 182 n . 9 Gombrowirz, Witold, Pornngraphia 8 1 , 1 82 n. 2 Gothic: art 46, 1 29 3 1 ; line 46, 1 05, 108; three ways of becoming 108. See also painting history of Gowing, Lawrence 1 88 n. 8, 1 89 n. 1 0, 1 9 1 n. 16, 1 94 n. 5 Grabar, Andre 1 9 1 n. 1 5 grass: in Bacon xv, 5, 3 1 , 1 1 0; in JapanesC' art 89 gray: 1 43; two types of optical versus haptic 1 33, 1 58, 1 96 n. 7; the "gray point" in Klee 1 02 Greco, EI 9, 25 Greek art 1 25-7; distinguished the planes 1 25; perspective in 1 25. See also painting history of Greenberg, Clement, interpretation of abstract expressionism 107, 185 n. 1 4, 186 n. 1 5 ; and shallow depth 188 n. 9 ground 5; in Egyptian art 1 23; and form 4, 1 25; in Gothic art 1 30; new relation to horizon 106, 108. See also background foreground Guattari, Felix 1 76 n. I hand (s) and eye 107, 1 54; and catastrophe 100- 1 ; in Egyptian art 1 22; liberation of 106; pure 103; four values of 154* 5 haptic 5; in Bacon 1 38; as originally Egyptian 1 22, 1 55; created through juxtap()�ition of colors 1 33; function 140; in Gauguin 1 43; defined hy Riegl 1 95 n. 2; space 143; as a value of the hand 1 55; vision 1 35 , 152, 1 6 1 ; head (s) 58; and abstraction 34; as culmination of body 20; and death masks 25; de boned 25; and deformation 1 9; cleared away by the diagram 100; versus face 20; and meat 25 Hegel, and aesthetics 1 78 n. 1 Herbin, Auguste 1 85 n. 9; plastic alphabet 1 04 horizon: and ground 108; new relation to ground 1 06 horizontal 1 1 8, 1 1 9, 1 20; and attendant rhythm 75; figural presentation 75 horror xiii, xiv � 1 5; and the scream 38, 60; becomes intense 52; of the world 6 1 Huysmans, J . K. 1 95 n. 1 2 hysteresis (delay) 4 9 50; "apros-coup" 99 hysteria 44--55; Bacon hystcricizes Vchisqucz 53 54; beforehand and afierwards 98; and the body 48; and Flaubert 5 1 ; in nineteenth-century handbooks 49; of painting 52, 98, 102 3; and presence 50; and psychiatry 49; and Sartre 5 1 ; versus schizophrenia 55; and sleeping figures 79; and the smile 28; two ways of avoiding 53. See al50 psychiatry illustration 2 3, 5, 8, 65, 67; and photography 90; undone by free marks 94; and image 2. See also figuration narration image(, ) : cinematic 87; and diches 86; doctored 9 1 ; figural 1 58; and newspapers 9 1 ; and television 87; virtual 86 impressionism xvii; Bacon's critique of 1 1 2; Cezanne's critique of 35; and the decomposition and recomposition of color 58; and Turner 105; impressions in body not air 35 indetermination 29; objective 1 3 7 indiscernibility zone of: 2 1 -3, 2 5 , 46, 59, 66, 1 3 7 , 1 5 7 . See also undecidability instinct 34; Bacon's 38; determined by sensation 39; versus feeling 39; defined as the passage ii'om one sensation to another 39 202 Index intensity 1 46, 1 47; axes of 45; and body without organs 44-5; gradients of 45; and magnitude 81 82; and sensation 45; thresholds of 44 5; vectors 45, 72; zero as principle or 8 1 Ireland 2 3 , 38; in Beckett and Bacon 49 isolation 4, 1 8, 50, 66, 83, 85; as a break with figuration 3; and coupling 2 1 2; isolation techniques of I �2, 30; amphitheater 1 31 4; armchairs I 2, 4; bar I, 30, 32; beds I, 4; eirdes 4, 32; whe 1 ; oval 32, 79; parallelepiped 1 , 4, 29 30, 40, 53; rail I; ring 6, 1 2, 14, 29 30; round area I , 1 2 , 6, 32, 40, 49; sofa 4; trapeze apparatus 1 5 , 23, 32, 84, 149; washbasin 1 5 -6, 32, 50, 1 46 Janvier, Ludovic 1 79 o . 7 Kafka, Franz 13� 14 , 1 76 n. 3, l S I n. 5; and Beckett 62; and the diabolical forces of the future 6 1 ; and immohility 4 1 ; and scandal 1 3 ; and spinal column 23; and swimmer 1 4 Kandinsky, Wassily 1 04, 109, 1 92 n. 1 8 Kant, Immanuel 8 1 , 1 82 n. 3; and principle of intensity H I ; Peguy on Kantian morality 1 03 Klee, Paul 182 n. I ; Maldiney on 1 85 n. 8; "rendering visible" 56; the "gray point" 102 landscape(2) 4 5 , 3 1 ; in Bacon 4 5; in Cezanne 1 42; as correlat(' of the Figure 4; Cezanne and Bacon compared 35; "created" by the photograph 9 1 ; in Mondrian 103 language: analogical versus digital 1 1 3; and color 1 1 3; and lines 1 1 3 Lawrence, D. H. 1 78 n. 2, 180 n. 2, 182 n. 5, 1 83 n� 2; on Cezanne 87 9; on Cezanne's apple 35 Le Bot, Marc 1 45, 1 9.'} n. I Leiris, Michel 6, 1 6 1 . 1 75 n. 10, 180 n. 8, 189 n. 4 life 1 38, 1 6 1 ; in Bacon 1 8 1 n. 6; and Beckett 62; in colorism 1 40; and df'ath 62: as horrific 52; imprisoned by the organism 45; nonorganic 46; rcndr[cd vi�i ble 63 203 light 27, 6:l; black 8+: and color xviii, 84, 133; in Greek art 1 26: and Impressionism 3:1; liberation of 1 3 1 2; pure 64; and shadow 5; as time 1 39; white B4 line( s): abstract 105; and color xiii, 52; without contour 1 09 10; as a definition of painting 1 .04; nat 1 29; of flight 54, 1 023 ; geometric' (Egyptian) 1 29; Gothic 46, 105, 108, 1 29: nonorganic 1 29; northern 129; and the diagram 99, 1 0 1 ; manual 1 04; nomadic 1 05; that are ' �morc than lines" 106; geologic I I I logi(, 65; irrational 83; of sensation xii, 42, 83 Louis, �forris 185 Il. 14; stain technique 105 Lucretius; and photography 9 1 ; the simulacrum 9 1 Lyotard , Jean-Fran�ois 1 73 n . I Maldiney, Henri 1 78 n. I , 1 79 n. 1 7, 1 85 n. 8, 1 87 n. I , 189 n. 2, 1 90 n. 6 rna/erisch 29; period in Bacon's work 66, 84, 1 1 0, 1 1 9, 1 36 8, 1 43, 1 49; translation of term 1 77 tl. 6. See also periods Malraux, Andre B mannerism and Michelangelo 1 6 1 manual: a s a value o f the hand 1 55; manual aggregates 1 30; in modern art 103. See also tactile manual space 1 30; and automatic wri ting 1 27; versus optical space 1 3 1 Marcy, Etienne-Julcs, his photographic rifle 92 marks: as accidental 94; of animality 2 1 ; free 5 , 7 , 46, 93; involuntary 5; manual 94, 96; nonrepresentative 94 mas()('hism; and body without organs 47 meat 22; and hones 22; and color 22 �3, 26, J SO; and crucifixions 24; and f,m:e 62; and head 25; and mouth 26; and pity 23; and pope 26; and suffering 23, 25 memory; as a ('oupling of sensations 67; involuntary (Proust) 66 67; ready- made 87 Merlcau-Ponty, Maurice 1 78 n. I Messaif'n, Olivier xvii xviii, 73, 148, 182 n. I. 182 n. 9. 195 n . 2; Index Chronochromie xvii, 148; on the three types af rhythm 72; "rhythmic characters" xviii, 72 Michaux, Henri, compared with Pollock 186 11. 1 7 Michelangelo 160, 196 n . 1 3; and the Figure xyii; and manual space 1 30 Millet, Jean-Fran�ois 57 mirror 27, 50; Bacon's use of 18 -19; and the body 1 3; as deformer 32; virtual 1 9 miserabilisme 45, 62 modulation and colorism 152; obtained through diflerences of value 146; and relations between colors 145; of color xvi, 1 40, 1 42; different function in Cezanne and Van Gogh 1 4 1 ; and haptic sense 1 40; as the law of analogy 1 1 8; of light 1 33; vcrsus molding 1 34, 192 n. 20; versus similitude 1 1 7; in Simondon 1 92 n. 20. See also mold mold 1 34, 1 92 n. 20; in tactile-optical space 1 34, 1 36; versus modulation 1 34; in Van Gogh and Gauguin 144. See also modulation Mandrian, Piet 103, 1 08, 185 n. 10, 186 n. 15; as architectonic 108; and mural painting 1 08; Monet, Claude: Cezanne's critique of 1 8 7 11 . 2; and relations o f tonality i n color 1 33 More, Marcel 1 80 n. 1 4 Mortiz, Karl Philipp 24 5, 4 1 , 1 76 n. 5 motif 54; Cezanne's term for "diagram" 1 1 2; search for 108 mouth (sl : as ahyss 6 1 ; and anus 47-8; in Bacon 48, 1 1 0; elongated by the diagram 42, 100; and meat 26; as organ 26; screaming 53, 6 1 ; series of 36 movement(s) : from field to Figure xv, 14 15, 32. 83; from Figure to field xv. 1 5, 1 8 , 32, 83; aspiration to 1 34; in Beckett 4 1 ; and body 1 5; cinematic 45; decomposition of in Duchamp 40; derivcd from forces 83; in Gothic line 130; and immobility xiv; in- place 4 1 ; intensive 19; in Kafka 4 1 ; "rendering" movement i n painting 58; as spasm 1 5, 4 1 , 45, 76; and sensation 40 1; of translation 75; as law of triptychs 83; vital 34, 43; violcnt 46 Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus, Requiem 55 music: and Bacon's paintings 79; disembodies the body 54; and the ear 55; and force 56-7; relation to painting 5 1 , 54 -5, 68; and rhythm 42; and the scream 60 mutilation(s) xiii, 62; add or subtract rhythmic value 79 Muybridge, Eadweard 40, 69; Bacon's use of his photographs 90 * 1 ; compared with Eisentstein 9 1 narration xviii, 2-3, 5, 1 2 , 65, 67, 70, 1 1 4, 1 34; dangers of 1 36; as an effert 1 36; and newspapers 87, 90; and photography 90; undone by free marks 94. See also figura tion illustration naturalism: formula of 39; and s("nsa tion 34 nature 1 08; in Cezanne 35, 43, 1 20; vcrsus artifire in Ba{'on 35, 43 :'IIazism 38, 78 nervous system 35, 5 1 2; and body without organs 45; avoids the brain 36; and color 52; and sensation 34; and violence 39; and vital emotion 45 Newman, Barnett xvi, 1 48, 185 ll. 1 4 newspapers 5 3 , 1 45; Bacon's use o f 6 ; a s cliches 8 7 ; "creatc" events 9 1 ; and narration 87, 90 Ncwton, Isaac on color 1 33, 139 :'>Ioland, Kenneth 1 85 n. 1 4 northern linr; see Gothic line oppositions rhythmic: augmentation- diminution 79; descending-rising 77 8; diastolic-systolic 78; naked- dothed 789 optical space 10 1 , 1 25, 1 36, 1 55; in Byzantine art 1 29; and color 1 33; d�stroyed hy catastrophe 1 0 1 ; in expressionism I07; in Greek art 1 25; its "intimary" or "homely atmosphere" 1 34; and tactile ground 1 06; freed from tactility 127; \'ersus manual space 1 3 1 ; optimism 52; in Bacon 43; nef\'OUS 6 1 . See also pessimism 204 Index organic representation 1 26, 1 60; dismantled 1 29. See also representation organism: and determinate organs 47; dismantling of 44 5; i mprisons life 45; and painting 108 organization: versus compm,ition 128 9 organ(s) : anus 50; artery 26, 28; and the body 16, 44--5; determined by forces 48; displaced 47; ear 55; indeterminate 47; mouth as 26, 47 8; and the organism 44-5; organization of 47; polyvalen t 48; provisional 47; stomach 50; temporary 48; transitory 48, 5 1 paint: power of 38-9; random spurts of 23; thrown 99 100; violence of 39 painting: act of 95, 99100, 10 I ; an analogical language 1 1 3, 1 1 7, 1 20; integrates its own catastrophe 1 0 2 3 ; defined by line and color :; 2 , 1 54; three dimensions of (plane color hody) 1 1 8; three elements of (in Bacon) 6, 30, 1 20, 1 24, 144, 1 .12; gives us eyes all over 52; and hysteria 5 1 2; compared with music 5 1 , 54 5, 63; painters know what they want to do but not how to get there 96; and photography 9; preparatory work 99, 1 02; prepictorial versus pictorial activities 96; and sensation 34 4:1 painting, history of xii, 1 22 �)4; Byzantine 1 2 7 -9; Christian 9, 1 24 5; Dutch 1 25; Egyptian 122 3; Gothic 1 29 1 3 1 ; Greek 1 25 7; Japanrse 1 4 1 ; modern 1 25; Oriental 1 2.1; primitive 1 4 1 ; seventeenth-century 1 28 9, 1 32; Western 1 24 Panofsky, Erwin 1 74 n. 7, 1 7 7 n. 6 Paris, Jean 1 94 n. 7, 1 95 n. 3 passive rhythm xviii; retrogradation of active rhythm 75; and sleeping figures 77 Peguy, Charles on Kantian morality 103 Peirce, Charles, Sanders: on the diagram 1 1 6; on icons; 1 1 6; on similitude 1 1 6; theory of the sign 188 n. 5 perception(s): of the field 1 48; readymade 87; temporal 148; in Van Gogh and Gauguin 1 4 1 periods o f Bacon's work 27 3 3 ; as coexistent 30; nas('cnt fourth 205 period 30 1; maLeri.,ch period 66, 84, 1 1 0, 1 1 9, J :l 6 8, 143, 1 49 perspective 1 08; in Greek art 1 25; replaced by the conjunction of planes 1 1 8 pessimism 52; in Bacon 43; C"crcbral 6 1 ; figurative 69. See also optimism phenomenology 34 5 ; and art 1 78 n. 1 ; and Bcing-in-the-World 34; and levels of sensation 4 1 2; and the lived body 44 photograph(s) photography 7 1 , 1 75 n. 1 , 1 75 n . 2 ; aesthetic status 9 1 ; plays role of attendant in Bacon 1 3 , 92; Bacon's use and rejection of 9, 68, 902; as cliches 87; "creates" a person or landscape 9 1 ; medical plates 90; and modern paintinl!; 8, 10 1 1 , 92; Muyhridge's 69, 90; photo-hooths 90; and representation 8 9, 88; and resemblance l 1 5 ; rrduecs sf'nsation to a single level 9 1 ; reigns over vision I I ; x-rays 90 Picasso, Pablo 1 1 9 Pinhas, Richard 1 88 n. 6 pity xiv; and meat 23 place(s) 2 , 6, 1 2 , 1 1 8; as apparatus I S ; and event 1 .1 ; a s equally probahle 93; and sensation 34; washbasin as 16 plane(s) ; in Byzantine art 1 27--8; and catastrophe 1 18; and the diagram 1 38; in Egyptian art 1 23; in Grct'k art 1 25; in tactile-optical world 1 36 Plato 87 Pollock, Jackson 1 06, 108, 185 11. 1 2 , 185 n. 14, 1 86 n. 1 5 ; "all over" drip paintings 106, 1 08; rejcetiol1 of eascl 1 08; and the "line without ('ontour" 1 05; compared with J\.fichaux 186 n_ 1 7 pope(S ) 28, and figuration 37; Pope Innocenl X ( Velasquez) 53 -4, 6 1 ; series of 36; pope series rejected by Bacon 90; SCff'amS before the invisible 38 portrait(s) 1 9; Bacon's views on 68; computer generated 1 1 4; of heads 20; modern 142_ See also self-portrait(s) prrscncc(s): and analogy 1 1 4; in Bacon's paintings 50; of the body 52; pure 54, 97; and rcprc<.;C'ntatlon 52 Index probability probabilities 93-4; contrasted with chance 94; and cliches 96; dice 94; equal and unequal 93; maximum 96; object of a possible science 94; as a pictorial given 94, See also chance prostheses xiii, 33, 62; add or subtract rhythmic value 79; syringe as 1 7 1 8 Proust, Marcel 66-8, 1 8 0 n, 13 , l S I n, 3 , 1 8 1 n, 4 , l S I n , 5; and involuntary memory 66 8; and motifs 54; and music 54; and philosophy 67 psychiatry; and an aesthetic clinic 54; anesthetics 49-50; autoscopia 49; hyperesthetics 49 50; and hysteria 49--50; and psychosis 49; and spastics 50. See also hysteria psychoanalysis 5 1 ; and an aesthetic clinic 54; and ambivalence 39; Bacon on 1 78 n, 1 4 Read, Herbert 1 77 n, 6 relation(s): in color 1 32--3; "completely different relations" 1 5 7 ; intelligible 4; nonlogical 65; of proximity 146; relief 1 20, 1 55; through color l I S religion 245; and painting S* 9; and sentiment 8-I I Rembrandt, van Rijn 22, 25, 42, 73, 1 25, I Sg n, 4, 190 n , 12; Claudel on 1 82 n, 5; genre paintings 73; use of light 84, 193 n, 4; and the manual line 1 3 1 ; and rhythmic characters 84; seU� portraits 36, 1 76 n, 6; still lifes 7 3 repetition 108 representation 2; and Cezanne 88; classical 103 -4, 107, 125, 1 26, 1 28; copy-model relation inverted in 86; definition of 2; and the Figure 97; and form 36; and images 2; optical organization of 1 0 1 ; organic 45, 52 -3, 160, in past painting 9; and photography 8 9; polygon of 3 1 ; and the rral 45; and sensation xiii, 37, 45; and violence 82, See al.ro classi.'al representation organicrepresentation resemblance 9 1 , 1 1 4, 1 2 1 ; and analogy 1 57; of man and bcast 25; nonfigurative 158; and photography 1 1 5; producer or produced l I S; produced through nonresembling means 98; sensible 1 1 51 6 resonance 65, 7 3 ; a s melodic 73; of sensations 68. See also forced movement vibration rhythm 33; active xviii, 7, 75, 77, 80-2; attendant 7 1 , 75, 80, 82; and Bacon 43; and body without organs 4455; discovered in the catastrophe 105; and chaos 44; as characters xviii, 72; circulation in triptychs 77; complexity of 79-80; as counterpoint 73; diagram as germ of 102; becomes Figure 7 1 ; and hearing 42; of light and shadow 1 28; as matter and material 1 06; as coexistence of movements 33; and music 42; passive xviii, 7 1 , 75, 77; and sensation 33, 34 43; and unity of the senses 44; distribution in triptychs 74 85, 1 20; three types of xviii, 71 2, 74, 82; and values 79 rhythmi<: characters: in �fessaien xviii, 72; engendered by light 84 Riegl, Alais 1 22, 1 74 n, 7, 1 89 n, 2, 1 9 1 n, 1 7, 195 n, 2 Rodin, Auguste 1 23 Rosenberg, Harold 185 n, 1 4 Russell, John 66--7, 1 77 n , 5 , 180 n, I , l S I n, 2 , 182 n, 8, 183 11. 5, 1 8 9 n, I , 189 n , 4 , 1 95 n, 5 ; o n Bacon's taste 1 53; on Man and Dog 70 Ryman, Robert, and fibers 106, 1 85 n, 1 3 Sahara 27, 159, 1 76 n , I , I S4 n , 2; distanc.es of 85; zone of 100 Samuel, Claude 1 82 n. I, 182 n, 9 Sartre, Jean Paul 1 80 n, 10, 1 82 n, 4; on Flaubert 5 1 schizophrenia: and body without organs 47; and hysteria 55 Schmidt, Georg 185 n, 1 0 Schumann, Robert 5 1 scream xiii, 26, 3 2 , 57, 1 1 0, 120, 1 80 n , 4 ; analysis o f 09 -60; and horror 38; and invisible forces 60; and mouth 27; and pope 26; and resemblance 1 1 4; series in Bacon 36 -7; and smile 28 sculpture: Bacon's relation to 1 23 4, 1 74 n, 8; and paintin" 6 seUCportrait (s) : in Bacon 36, 58; in Rembrandt 25, 36, See aho portrait(s) sensation: " best" 40; found in the body not in light 35, 45; in Christian 206 Index painting 9; clarity and duration of 1 1 0, 1 1 2; "coagulated" 37, 1 60; coloring xii, 1 1 2; confused (Cezanne) 100; coupling of 65� 73; and deformation 36; and the fall 80 8 1 ; and feeling 39; and Figure 34; finds its condition in force 56; in Hegel 1 7 8 n . 1 ; has only an intensive reality 45; levels or orders of 1 0, 36 7, 48, 65, 72; lagitof xii, 42, 83; and mcmory 67; motor hypothesis of 40; and nervous system 39; excceds the organism 45; "paint the sensation" 66, 72; and painting 34 43; pat hie moment of 42, 1 78 n. I ; and phenomenology 34 .1, 1 78 n. I ; photographs reduce sensation to a single level 9 1 ; real rather than representative xiii, 45; and rhythm 42; versus the sensational 34, 38 -9, 45, 90; and series 36; and Serusier 1 87 n. 3; as spasmodic 45; and spontaneity 34; versus the spectade 6 1 ; "unlocking areas of sensation" 102; violence of xvii, 38, 82 sense organs 4 1 2; " existential" communication of 42; hcaring 42; logic of (Cezanne) 42; rhythmic unity of 42, 44; smell 42; touch 42 separation: in light and ('olor 84; on a single canvas 70; in triptychs 63, 64; and union xix, 84, 1 08 series: Bacon's use of 36; dosed 37, 80; of (Tucifixions 90; of heads 58; of :lelt:* portraits 58; and sensation 36; "shifting sequences" 36 77 Serusier, Paul: and abstraction 1 1 2 1 3; on the basic "units" of a code 1 1 2 1 3 Scrvien, Puis 1 83 n . 9 ; aesthetic theory of 94 shadow (s) 4, 30; as much presence as the body 16; as figural 5 ; and light 1 28; struggle with 62; and thickness 29 Simondon, Gilbert: on modulation 1 92 n. 20 sleep(ing) 69, 79; and awakening 79; and flattened Figures xiv; force of 59: and hysteria 79; and the rhythmfunction 767; smile 63, 66, 1 1 0, 1 76 n. 2; as an attendant rhythm 75; as hysterical 28, 50� I ; and Lewis Carroll 28; and scream 28; and presence 5 1 ; :leric:l of in Bacon 37 Sollier, Paul 1 79 11. '> sound: and color 55; and painting ) I Sou tine Chaim 223, 73; and meat +2; and heads 25; pity f{>r the Jew 23 space: dosed 6; as color 139; in Greek art 126; haptic 1 43; manual 1 2 7, 1 30; optical 125, 1 27; tactile- optical 1 26 spectacle 62; elimination of 1 3 ; versus sensa tion 6 1 ; of wai ting or effort 1 3 spectator(s) 7 0 I ; elimination of 13 � 1 4; and feeling 39; and painting 35 sphinx: and Baron 124; in Egyptian art 1 23; and sand 3 1 spirituality: and abstract art 1 03 4; animal 20; of the body 47; and head 20; and the organic 46 Stendahl 55 still lifes: in Cezanne 1 42; Cezanne and Bacon compared 35; in Rembrandt 73 story storytelling 3, 38, 65, 69, 70; boredom of its Couvc)'ance 36. See also figuration illustration narration Stravinsky, Igor 73 strokqsl trait(.l) and the diagram 1 0 1 ; in Gothic art 1 30. See aha line structure 30; as clement of system 32; and Figure 20; and forces 14; material 6. See also field !s) SUriiUT; and Gothic lint' 46; in Egyptian art 1 22; in expressionism 106; sidewalk as 6, 30 surrealism 97 Sylvester, David 29, 39 symbols; in Pcirrc 1 1 6; symbolism xvii synthesizers: and the analogical/digital distinction 1 1 6; two types of filters 1 1 6 I 7; modular versus integral 1 1 6 system; Bacon's 6 -7, 30, 32; three clements of (Figure contour field) 6, 1 2 , 30, 1 20, 1 24, 144 5, 1 52; systole 33, 42, 78, 1 79 ll. 1 7 . See a/.,o diastole rhythm tache, translation of 184 n. tactile 5; connections 1 28; as a value of the hand 1 55; definition of term 1 74 n. 7; tactile space; in expressionism 1 07; and the ,*isual I03� 4. See a/.lo manual 207 Index tactile-optical space 126, 1 34; and figuration I SS 6; and the mold 1 36; versus optical space 1 3 1 Talking Heads 158, 1 96 n . 6 taste: good taste 152; Michael on 1 52; sense of 42 Tati, J acques 1 75 n. 9 techniques Bacon\: use of brooms 5; brushing 5, 2 1 , 29, 30, 46, 100, 1 09; extraction 2; random spurts of paint 23; paintbrush 106, 154; usc of pastels 3 1 ; use of rags 5, 106, 109; rubbing 2 1 , 1 00, 1 58; scrubbing 5, 7 , 46, 9 9 ; sketches 99; use o f sticks 106, 1 09; stretching 1 8; striping 29; use of sponges 106; sweeping 58, 99; use of syringe 1 7 1 8, 106; throwing paint 99 100; wiping 58, 99, 100; tension 32; and abstraction 103; experienced in a fall 8 1 ; lacking in abstract painting 109 time 1 48; as Aeon 85; and body without organs 48; changing 63, 143; and chromatism 48, 85; and color 1 43; and the diagram 1 1 1 1 2; and eternity 63, 143; and Figure 48; and force 57; form of 148; and monochromatism 85; two modes of 48, 63, 1 43, 1 6 1 ; and variation 48; rendered visi ble 63 Tintoretto, J arnpo 1 0 tonality tone(s) 4 , bright 1 4 1 ; broken 1 40, 1 4 1 , 145, 1 93 n. 4 ; and rolor 1 32; pure 140, 193 n. 4 trait(s) 144; of animality 2 1 ; asignifying 5 , 2 1 , 1 00, 1 73 n . 6; produce a catastrophe 100; definition of term 1 73 n. 6; and the diagram 99; and f;HT 42, 1 76 n. I; irrational 1 09; manual 97, 100; transformation 1 1 8; versus deformation 36, 59, 91 2, \05; screaming 32; and transfiguration 1 28 triptych(s) xvii, 63, 65 73; role of attendants in 1 3 ; Bacon's use of 72; usc of color in 1 47; as a means of breaking with easel 1 08; empirical study of 74 85; laws of 82 3; mobility within 77; nature of 72; all paintings composed like 85; relationship between panels 3, 63, 69; distribution of rhythm in xviii, 74--84; as series of simultaneity 37 Turner, J. M. W.: and "eye" of hurricane 3 1 , 105, 1 3 7 ; steamship in 3 1 ; and relations of tonality in color 1 33; late watercolors 105 umbrella 32, 50, 66, 156; analogues of washbasins 1 7; Bacon's usc of 1 7; virtual 1 9 undecidability 2 1 . See also indiscernibility union and separation xix, 84, 1 08; in the triptychs 63, 64. See ""0 separation unity; distributive 85; of light and color 84; limitative 85 Valery, Paul 36 value(s ) : added or subtraeted 79; and color 132; and rhythm 79 Van Gogh, Vincent 4, 40, 194 n. 7; an "arbitrary colorist" 1 4 1 , 194 n. 8; and color xvi, 1 92 n. 2, 193 n. 3 , 193 n. 4; and colorism 140; his diagram 1 02; and forces 57; and the infini te 1 94 n. 9; and perception 1 4 1 ; on the portrait 195 n. \0; Raulin postman painting 1 4 1 variation(s) 4 ; allotropic 45, 63; and attendants 1 3; of color 48; double 7 1 ; of intensity o r saturation 1 46; in rhythm 7 7 , 82 3; temporal 48, 1 43; of texture 48; in verticality 77; of wave 45 Vasari, Giorgio 1 90 n. I I Vclasquez, Diego 53, 1 75 n. I , 1 85 n. I I ; Pope innocent X 53-4, 90 vertical 1 1 8 20; and active and passive rhythm 75; variation 77. See also horizontal vibration 65-6, 72; allotropic 7 1 ; and contour 73; decreasing ( passive rhythm) 7 1 ; increasing (active rhythm) 7 1 ; power of 1 1 0. See also forced movcmrnt resonance vigilambu1ist 49; stroll of 50 violence xiii; justifIed religiously 1 0; maximum found in immobile Figures 38; of sensation xiii, 38, 82; sensation versus representation XVII; two meanings of 39, 6 1 , 82 208 Index \'ision: and photography I I ; ami rhythm 42: mil apse of visual coordinates 102, 1 06. See (11.10 close vision vital vitality 34, 6 1 ; and ('motion it:'>; geometry 46; movement 43; nonorganic 1 29and rhythm 42; volume: in Cezanne 1 1 3; in expressionism 106 war 38; and painting 39; violence of 39 wave 49; and body without organs 44 5; efleets of (anticipation precipitation) 49; n('rvous 45, 49; of variable amplitude 47 will: and catastrophe 100 I; foreign as in automatic writing 1 27; spiritual 46; "the will to lose the will" 92 Wittgenstein, Ludwig 196 n. I I ; and " possibilities of fan" 1 0 1 209 Wiillllin, Heinrich 1 7 7 1 1 . 6, 1 90 n . 7. 1 90 n. H, 1 90 II. 1 2, 191 n. 13: anrl color 1 :tZ: anel optical spacc 1 32 world: dmcd 32, 68, 1 20; unlimited 32; Bacon's versus C['zannC''s 1 20: phenomenological 42; and self 42 Worringer, Wilhelm 46, 1 08, 1 29, 1 79 n. 2, 1 86 n. 1 5 , 1 90 n. 5, 1 90 n . 9; nonorganic life 46, 108; the Gothic line I DB, 1 29 30 wrestler(s) 62, 68; in Muybridge 69 zone (s) 58, 99; blurry xv; and the diagram 1 0 1 ; of the field 1 46; of indiscernibility 21 -3, 25, 46, 59, 1 37, 1 57; of intensity 4.'); missing 50; nontigurativc 5; of proximity xvi; scrambled 1 57 , 1 59; scrubbed xv, 1 9, 1 1 0; wiped-off 3